Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai...
Transcript of Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai...
![Page 1: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
GE Multilin’s Quality Management System is
registered to ISO9001:2008
QMI # 005094
GE Digital Energy
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Tel: +1 905 927 7070 Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Internet: http://www.gedigitalenergy.com
Instruction ManualMultilin DGCS Switch Controller Firmware Revision: 1.40
Manual P/N: 1601-0260-B1
GE Publication Code: GEK-119533
*1601-0258-B1*
Multilin DGCSSwitch Controller
GEDigital Energy
![Page 2: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Copyright © 2013 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
The Multilin DGCS Switch Controller™ Instruction Manual for revision 1.40.
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller, EnerVista™, EnerVista Launchpad™, and EnerVista DGCS Setup™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin. This manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Part number: 1601-0260-B1 (February 2013)
![Page 3: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Note
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Thoroughly and carefully read this instruction sheet and the product manual before programming, operating, or maintaining the DGC Controller. Familiarize yourself with “SAFETY INFORMATION” on this page.
• The equipment covered by this publication must be installed, operated, and maintained by qualified personal who are knowledgeable in the installation, operation, and maintenance of overhead electric power distribution equipment along with the associated hazards.
• The user shall be responsible for ensuring the integrity of any Protective conductor connections before carrying out other actions”
• It is the responsibility of the user to check the equipment ratings and operating Instructions / installation Instructions prior to commissioning, service.
• Prior to servicing / commissioning ensure the Protective earth (PE) conductor is connected to Earth Ground prior to conducting any work
• This product requires an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
• Ensure that the protective earth (PE) terminal is suited with a recommended wire size of 14 awg minimum. The (PE) terminal lug must be fastened with a #8 stud with a required torque of 18-20 in/lb.
• Prior to commencing work on CTs’ ccts these shall be short circuited.
• Ensure to contact the remote user prior to approaching the DGCS to conduct local work.
• Use a lift system with side rails/bucket to reduce a fall hazard as opposed to other means when installing or servicing.
• Do not disconnect power connectors on the DGCS when the system is on LIVE.
• Ensure the DGCS outer cabinet is re-locked after local service is completed
• This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used exclusively in Utility or Substation environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
• Integrating an untested radio into the OEM module may result in functional performance deterioration due to unknown RF immunity effects. At a minimum the Radio must comply with the R&TTE directive and FCC and Industry Canada registered respecting the local RF regulations For Europe and North America. The radios maximum primary rating cannot exceed 13.8 Vdc 12W continuous operation and @2A max transmitting current.
• The antenna provided must not be replaced with a different type. Attaching a different antenna will void the FCC and IC approval and the FCC /IC ID can no longer be considered.
• When Equipped with a Radio rated for North America
For MDS iNETII radio Contains Transmitter with FCC ID: E5MDS-INETII/CAN 3738A-INETII
For MDS TransNet Radio Contains Transmitter with FCC ID: E5MDS-EL805/IC: 3738A 12122
For MDS SD4 radio Contains Transmitter with FCC ID: E5MDS-SD4/IC: 101D-SD4
Note BATTERY: The onboard battery can be replaced only by the same model type. Any other batteries used may not provide the safety nor performance required.
![Page 4: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
FCC/Industry Canada
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC and Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
L’appareil conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisé aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Safety Words and DefinitionsThe following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions:
Note Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Note Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Note Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Note Indicates significant issues and practices that are not related to personal injury.
NOTE
Indicates general information and practices, including operational information and practices, that are not related to personal injury.
![Page 5: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
EN Battery Disposal
This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the product documentation for specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may include lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling return the battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info.
CS Nakládání s bateriemi
Tento produkt obsahuje baterie, které nemohou být zneškodněny v Evropské unii jako netříděný komunální odpadu. Viz dokumentace k produktu pro informace pro konkrétní baterie. Baterie je označena tímto symbolem, který může zahrnovat i uvedena písmena, kadmium (Cd), olovo (Pb), nebo rtuť (Hg). Pro správnou recyklaci baterií vraťte svémudodavateli nebo na určeném sběrném místě. Pro více informací viz: www.recyclethis.info
DA Batteri affald
Dette produkt indeholder et batteri som ikke kan bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald i Europa. Se produktinformation for specifikke informationer om batteriet. Batteriet er forsynet med indgraveret symboler for hvad batteriet indeholder: kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) og kviksølv (Hg). Europæiske brugere af elektrisk udstyr skal aflevere kasserede produkter til genbrug eller til leverandøren. Yderligere oplysninger findes på webstedet www.recyclethis.info.
DE Entsorgung von Batterien
Dieses Produkt beinhaltet eine Batterie, die nicht als unsortierter städtischer Abfall in der europäischen Union entsorgt werden darf. Beachten Sie die spezifischen Batterie-informationen in der Produktdokumentation. Die Batterie ist mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnet, welches auch Hinweise auf möglicherweise enthaltene Stoffe wie Kadmium (Cd), Blei (Pb) oder Quecksilber (Hektogramm) darstellt . Für die korrekte Wiederverwertung bringen Sie diese Batterie zu Ihrem lokalen Lieferanten zurück oder entsorgen Sie das Produkt an den gekennzeichneten Sammelstellen. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie auf der folgenden Website: www.recyclethis.info.
EL Απόρριψη μπαταριών
Αυτό το προϊόν περιέχει μια μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα. ∆είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία. Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο, το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο (Cd), τον μόλυβδο (Pb), ή τον υδράργυρο (Hg). Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον προμηθευτή σας ή σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες δείτε: www.recyclethis.info.
ES Eliminacion de baterias
Este producto contiene una batería que no se pueda eliminar como basura normal sin clasificar en la Unión Europea. Examine la documentación del producto para la información específica de la
batería. La batería se marca con este símbolo, que puede incluir siglas para indicar el cadmio (Cd), el plomo (Pb), o el mercurio (Hg ). Para el reciclaje apropiado, devuelva este producto a su distribuidor ó deshágase de él en los puntos de reciclaje designados. Para mas información: wwwrecyclethis.info.
ET Patareide kõrvaldamine
Käesolev toode sisaldab patareisid, mida Euroopa Liidus ei tohi kõrvaldada sorteerimata olmejäätmetena. Andmeid patareide kohta vaadake toote dokumentatsioonist. Patareid on märgistatud käesoleva sümboliga, millel võib olla kaadmiumi (Cd), pliid (Pb) või elavhõbedat (Hg) tähistavad tähed. Nõuetekohaseks ringlusse võtmiseks tagastage patarei tarnijale või kindlaksmääratud vastuvõtupunkti. Lisainformatsiooni saab Internetist aadressil: www.recyclethis.info.
FI Paristoje ja akkujen hävittäminen
Tuote sisältää pariston, jota ei saa hävittää Euroopan Unionin alueella talousjätteen mukana. Tarkista tuoteselosteesta tuotteen tiedot. Paristo on merkitty tällä symbolilla ja saattaa sisältää cadmiumia (Cd), lyijyä (Pb) tai elohopeaa (Hg). Oikean kierrätystavan varmistamiseksi palauta tuote paikalliselle jälleenmyyjälle tai palauta se paristojen keräyspisteeseen. Lisätietoja sivuilla www.recyclethis.info.
FR Élimination des piles
Ce produit contient une batterie qui ne peuvent être éliminés comme déchets municipaux non triés dans l'Union européenne. Voir la documentation du produit au niveau des renseignements sur la pile. La batterie est marqué de ce symbole, qui comprennent les indications cadmium (Cd), plomb (Pb), ou mercure (Hg). Pour le recyclage, retourner la batterie à votre fournisseur ou à un point de collecte. Pour plus d'informations, voir: www.recyclethis.info.
HU Akkumulátor hulladék kezelése
Ezen termék akkumulátort tartalmaz, amely az Európai Unión belül csak a kijelölt módon és helyen dobható ki. A terméken illetve a mellékelt ismertetőn olvasható a kadmium (Cd), ólom (Pb) vagy higany (Hg) tartalomra utaló betűjelzés. A hulladék akkumulátor leadható a termék forgalmazójánál új akkumulátor vásárlásakor, vagy a kijelölt elektronikai hulladékudvarokban. További információ a www.recyclethis.info oldalon.
IT Smaltimento batterie
Questo prodotto contiene una batteria che non può essere smaltita nei comuni contenitori per lo smaltimento rifiuti, nell' Unione Europea. Controllate la documentazione del prodotto per le informazioni specifiche sulla batteria. La batteria è contrassegnata con questo simbolo e può includere alcuni caratteri ad indicare la presenza di cadmio (Cd), piombo (Pb) oppure mercurio (Hg). Per il corretto smaltimento, potete restituirli al vostro fornitore locale, oppure rivolgervi e consegnarli presso i centri di raccolta preposti. Per maggiori informazioni vedere: ww.recyclethis.info.
![Page 6: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
LT Baterijų šalinimas
Šios įrangos sudėtyje yra baterijų, kurias draudžiama šalinti Europos Sąjungos viešose nerūšiuotų atliekų šalinimo sistemose. Informaciją apie baterijas galite rasti įrangos techninėje dokumentacijoje. Baterijos žymimos šiuo simboliu, papildomai gali būti nurodoma kad baterijų sudėtyje yra kadmio (Cd), švino (Pb) ar gyvsidabrio (Hg). Eksploatavimui nebetinkamas baterijas pristatykite į tam skirtas surinkimo vietas arba grąžinkite jas tiesioginiam tiekėjui, kad jos būtų tinkamai utilizuotos. Daugiau informacijos rasite šioje interneto svetainėje: www.recyclethis.info.
LV Bateriju likvidēšana
Šis produkts satur bateriju vai akumulatoru, kuru nedrīkst izmest Eiropas Savienībā esošajās sadzīves atkritumu sistēmās. Sk. produkta dokumentācijā, kur ir norādīta konkrēta informācija par bateriju vai akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora marķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda kadmiju (Cd), svinu (Pb) vai dzīvsudrabu (Hg). Pēc ekspluatācijas laika beigām baterijas vai akumulatori jānodod piegādātājam vai specializētā bateriju savākšanas vietā. Sīkāku informāciju var iegūt vietnē: www.recyclethis.info.
NL Verwijderen van baterijen
Dit product bevat een batterij welke niet kan verwijdert worden via de gemeentelijke huisvuilscheiding in de Europese Gemeenschap. Gelieve de product documentatie te controleren voor specifieke batterij informatie. De batterijen met deze label kunnen volgende indictaies bevatten cadium (Cd), lood (Pb) of kwik (Hg). Voor correcte vorm van kringloop, geef je de producten terug aan jou locale leverancier of geef het af aan een gespecialiseerde verzamelpunt. Meer informatie vindt u op de volgende website: www.recyclethis.info.
NO Retur av batteri
Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen. Se produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon. Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å indikere at kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb), eller kvikksølv (Hg) forekommer. Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjenvinning. For mer informasjon se: www.recyclethis.info.
PL Pozbywanie się zużytych baterii
Ten produkt zawiera baterie, które w Unii Europejskiej mogą być usuwane tylko jako posegregowane odpady komunalne. Dokładne informacje dotyczące użytych baterii znajdują się w dokumentacji produktu. Baterie oznaczone tym symbolem mogą zawierać dodatkowe oznaczenia literowe wskazujące na zawartość kadmu (Cd), ołowiu (Pb) lub rtęci (Hg). Dla zapewnienia właściwej utylizacji, należy zwrócić baterie do dostawcy albo do wyznaczonego punktu zbiórki. Więcej informacji można znaleźć na stronie internetowej www.recyclethis.info.
PT Eliminação de Baterias
Este produto contêm uma bateria que não pode ser considerado lixo municipal na União Europeia. Consulte a documentação do produto para obter informação específica da bateria. A bateria é identificada por meio de este símbolo, que pode incluir a rotulação para indicar o cádmio (Cd), chumbo (Pb), ou o mercúrio (hg). Para uma reciclagem apropriada envie a bateria para o seu fornecedor ou para um ponto de recolha designado. Para mais informação veja: www.recyclethis.info.
RU Утилизация батарей
Согласно европейской директиве об отходах электрического и электронного оборудования, продукты, содержащие батареи, нельзя утилизировать как обычные отходы на территории ЕС. Более подробную информацию вы найдете в документации к продукту. На этом символе могут присутствовать буквы, которые означают, что батарея собержит кадмий (Cd), свинец (Pb) или ртуть (Hg). Для надлежащей утилизации по окончании срока эксплуатации пользователь должен возвратить батареи локальному поставщику или сдать в специальный пункт приема. Подробности можно найти на веб-сайте: www.recyclethis.info.
SK Zaobchádzanie s batériami
Tento produkt obsahuje batériu, s ktorou sa v Európskej únii nesmie nakladať ako s netriedeným komunálnym odpadom. Dokumentácia k produktu obsahuje špecifické informácie o batérii. Batéria je označená týmto symbolom, ktorý môže obsahovať písmená na označenie kadmia (Cd), olova (Pb), alebo ortuti (Hg). Na správnu recykláciu vráťte batériu vášmu lokálnemu dodávateľovi alebo na určené zberné miesto. Pre viac informácii pozrite: www.recyclethis.info.
SL Odlaganje baterij
Ta izdelek vsebuje baterijo, ki je v Evropski uniji ni dovoljeno odstranjevati kot nesortiran komunalni odpadek. Za posebne informacije o bateriji glejte dokumentacijo izdelka. Baterija je označena s tem simbolom, ki lahko vključuje napise, ki označujejo kadmij (Cd), svinec (Pb) ali živo srebro (Hg). Za ustrezno recikliranje baterijo vrnite dobavitelju ali jo odstranite na določenem zbirališču. Za več informacij obiščite spletno stran: www.recyclethis.info.
SV Kassering av batteri
Denna produkt innehåller ett batteri som inte får kastas i allmänna sophanteringssytem inom den europeiska unionen. Se produktdokumentationen för specifik batteriinformation. Batteriet är märkt med denna symbol, vilket kan innebära att det innehåller kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) eller kvicksilver (Hg). För korrekt återvinning skall batteriet returneras till leverantören eller till en därför avsedd deponering. För mer information, se: www.recyclethis.info. TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir. Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz. Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum(Cd), Kurşun(Pb) ya da Civa(Hg) içerebilir. Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız. Daha fazla bilgi için: www.recyclethis.info.
TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü
Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir. Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz. Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum(Cd), Kurşun(Pb) ya da Civa(Hg) içerebilir. Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız. Daha fazla bilgi için: www.recyclethis.info.
Global Contacts
North America 905-294-6222
Latin America +55 11 3614 1700
Europe, Middle East, Africa +(34) 94 485 88 00
Asia +86-21-2401-3208
![Page 7: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC–I
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION Overview........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 1Description of the DGCS Controllers................................................................................... 1 - 1DGCS Order Codes ....................................................................................................................... 1 - 7Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 1 - 7
Inputs ..........................................................................................................................................................1 - 7Outputs.......................................................................................................................................................1 - 8Configuration...........................................................................................................................................1 - 8Power supply ........................................................................................................................................ 1 - 10Fuses......................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 10Battery ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 10Communications................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10Testing and Certification ................................................................................................................. 1 - 11Environmental...................................................................................................................................... 1 - 12Accuracy................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 12
2. INSTALLATION Mechanical installation.............................................................................................................. 2 - 2Electrical installation ................................................................................................................... 2 - 4
3. INTERFACES Front Control Panel Interface.................................................................................................. 3 - 1Working with the Keypad ..................................................................................................................3 - 3LED Status Indicators...........................................................................................................................3 - 5
Software Setup .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 6EnerVista DGCS Setup Software.....................................................................................................3 - 6Connecting EnerVista DGCS Setup to the Device................................................................ 3 - 10Working with Settings and Settings Files ................................................................................ 3 - 13Upgrading DGCS firmware............................................................................................................. 3 - 20Advanced EnerVista DGCS Setup features............................................................................ 3 - 21
4. ACTUAL VALUES A1 Status........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2Contact inputs.........................................................................................................................................4 - 2Clock ............................................................................................................................................................4 - 3Output relays ...........................................................................................................................................4 - 3Virtual inputs............................................................................................................................................4 - 3Virtual outputs ........................................................................................................................................4 - 3Contact inputs summary ...................................................................................................................4 - 4Output relays summary......................................................................................................................4 - 4Flexlogic summary................................................................................................................................4 - 4RTDs .............................................................................................................................................................4 - 4
A2 Metering ..................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5Current........................................................................................................................................................4 - 7Voltage .......................................................................................................................................................4 - 7Sequences.................................................................................................................................................4 - 7Power ..........................................................................................................................................................4 - 8Energy .........................................................................................................................................................4 - 8Frequency .................................................................................................................................................4 - 8Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) .....................................................................................................4 - 8Harmonics.................................................................................................................................................4 - 9Default screens.................................................................................................................................... 4 - 11Power calculation............................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
![Page 8: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
TOC–II MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A3 Records .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 13Event records ........................................................................................................................................4 - 13Data logger ............................................................................................................................................4 - 14
A4 Messages................................................................................................................................. 4 - 16Target Messages .................................................................................................................................4 - 16Self-Test Errors .....................................................................................................................................4 - 17Flash Messages....................................................................................................................................4 - 17
5. SETTINGS S1 Product Setup...........................................................................................................................5 - 1Clock............................................................................................................................................................ 5 - 3Password security................................................................................................................................. 5 - 4Communications ................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5Event recorder ........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 7Datalogger ............................................................................................................................................... 5 - 8Front panel ............................................................................................................................................... 5 - 9Installation..............................................................................................................................................5 - 10
S2 System setup ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 11Current sensing....................................................................................................................................5 - 13Voltage sensing....................................................................................................................................5 - 14Power system........................................................................................................................................5 - 16Open/Close Setup ...............................................................................................................................5 - 16Circuit breaker setup .........................................................................................................................5 - 19Battery backup.....................................................................................................................................5 - 20
S3 Configuration......................................................................................................................... 5 - 26Phase IOC................................................................................................................................................5 - 28Phase TOC...............................................................................................................................................5 - 29Neutral overcurrent ...........................................................................................................................5 - 39Phase overvoltage..............................................................................................................................5 - 42Phase undervoltage...........................................................................................................................5 - 44Voltage unbalance .............................................................................................................................5 - 46Power loss...............................................................................................................................................5 - 49Auto sectionalizing .............................................................................................................................5 - 51Wearing monitor .................................................................................................................................5 - 56
S4 Controls .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 61Remote control.....................................................................................................................................5 - 61Open/Close control ............................................................................................................................5 - 62Change settings group.....................................................................................................................5 - 67Virtual inputs .........................................................................................................................................5 - 68Cold load pickup ..................................................................................................................................5 - 69FlexLogic™ .............................................................................................................................................5 - 72
S5 Inputs/Outputs...................................................................................................................... 5 - 76Contact inputs ......................................................................................................................................5 - 76Output relays.........................................................................................................................................5 - 77Virtual inputs .........................................................................................................................................5 - 80
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
SELF-TEST WARNINGS ...............................................................................................................6 - 1
7. COMMANDS Commands.......................................................................................................................................7 - 1
8. MAINTENANCE M1 Product information .............................................................................................................8 - 2M2 Product maintenance..........................................................................................................8 - 2
![Page 9: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC–III
M3 Statistics .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 3Counters ....................................................................................................................................................8 - 3Reset counters ........................................................................................................................................8 - 3Preset counters ......................................................................................................................................8 - 3
![Page 10: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
TOC–IV MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
![Page 11: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The DGCS is a microprocessor-based unit that belongs to the Distribution Grid Controller family, and it is designed as a switch controller. This device is intended to control and monitor different types of medium voltage switches, primarily load and no-load breaking switches (LBS/NLS) used on distribution feeders. Fault-current-breaking units like circuit breakers or reclosers cannot be controlled by the DGCS (DGC switch controller).
Description of the DGCS Controllers
The distribution feeders are equipped with feeder DGC Switch Controllers (pole-top, pad-mount) that are typically installed at the source end of the feeder. Distribution circuits called “laterals” are connected between two consecutive feeder switches. They are protected by over-current fuses and they are not automated. A typical distribution feeder layout is depicted in Figure below.
![Page 12: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
1–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF THE DGCS CONTROLLERS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Figure 1: Typical distribution feeders layout
The switches are grouped into three main groups:
• Reclosers: These switches are capable of interrupting fault currents. They are similar to breakers.
• Load Breaking Switches: These switches are not capable of interrupting fault currents, but can interrupt load currents. They can open only during a normal load condition, or when the circuit breaker in the substation is opened.
• No-load switches: These switches are not capable of interrupting neither during fault , nor during normal load conditions. They can only open or close when the circuit breaker in the substation is opened.
As mentioned before, the DGC Switch Controller is intended to control load and no-load breaking switches. The switches are usually located on the trunk of the distribution feeder.The controller is equipped with 6 voltage and 3 current inputs that can be connected to voltage and current transformers respectively, or to any other voltage and current sensors with AC outputs within the specified voltage and current ranges. The controller uses two auxiliary contacts (52a and 52b) to detect open/close switch position, and produce an alarm flag in case of the contacts discrepancy. This is implemented in a hardcoded logic producing output flags that can be used to build user defined logic.The DGCS is equipped with a set of standard function elements available for the user through inputting related setting values. Additional functions that are not part of the standard DGCS element set can be easily configured and implemented using FlexLogic™ functionality.The controller is equipped with MDS radio that securely transmits data to the subscribed distribution automation devices, relays, SCADA, etc. The transmission uses DNP 3.0 protocol. The figure below depicts the section of a distribution feeder, where a DGC Switch Controller is used:
![Page 13: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE DGCS CONTROLLERS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–3
Figure 2: DGCS used as a feeder switch controller
The controller is equipped with the following AC inputs:
• 6 PT inputs (Ph-Ph / Ph-N configurations)
• 3 CT inputs (Phase currents)
The main purpose of the DGC Switch Controller is to provide voltage and power measurements, voltage- and current-based computations, as well as several other digital parameters at the local point. In addition, this information can be transmitted to the remote user.MAIN FUNCTIONS OF THE DGC SWITCH CONTROLLER
The DGCS provides two modes of operation:
• Remote mode
• Local mode
The mode can be selected only by using the faceplate pushbutton. When in Remote mode, the DGCS accepts remote commands to operate the switch. When in Local mode, remote commands are blocked and only local commands can be executed. The local commands are available only at the DGCS faceplate (pushbuttons, keypad and LED).The DGCS provides two types of the open/close command execution:
• Manual
• Auto
In Manual, the user is directly issuing an open or a close command to the controller. In Auto, the commands are executed by programmable function elements that are running on the controller. Both (open and close) commands are interlocked with various detection functions in order to avoid the switch to be operated at certain current and voltage levels (depending on the switch type).The DGC Switch Controller is capable of measuring three phase voltages and currents from the electric distribution line. Based on the measured quantities, it can perform the following:AC Parameters Level Detections
• Power Loss
• Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
• Phase Timed Overcurrent
• Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
• Phase Overvoltage
• Phase Undervoltage
![Page 14: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
1–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF THE DGCS CONTROLLERS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
• Phase Voltage Unbalance
Automatic Logic Functions
• Auto Sectionalizing
• CLP (Cold Load Pickup)
AC PARAMETERS LEVEL DETECTIONS
Each level detection function generates a flag that is logged as an event. Power Loss: The controller provides a technique of specifying minimum load current (xCT) threshold and minimum voltage (xVT) threshold. When both quantities are below the threshold (pickup) level, the DGCS will generate a flag representing power loss.Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent:: The controller provides a technique of specifying the instantaneous overcurrent condition for the switch, and generates a flag during overload conditions. The flag may be used to block the opening of the switch, if the overload level is above the switch rating. The flags are generated and reported to the master host via the radio communications.Phase Timed Overcurrent: The controller provides a technique of specifying the timed overcurrent condition for the switch. The user can select different overload curves as a part of the setup procedure for the actual application. During the overload condition the controller generates a flag. The flag may be used to block the opening of the switch, if the overload level is above the switch rating. The flags are generated and reported to the master host via the radio communications.Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent: The controller provides a technique of specifying the maximum allowed neutral current level above which the controller generates a flag to indicate abnormal ground fault condition.Overvoltage: The controller provides a technique of setting the maximum phase voltage level, above which the controller generates a flag to indicate abnormal overvoltage condition.Phase undervoltage: The controller provides a technique of setting the minimum phase voltage level, below which the controller generates a flag to indicate loss of potential condition.Voltage unbalance and phase loss: The controller provides a technique of setting the maximum negative sequence voltage level, above which the controller generates a flag to indicate voltage unbalance condition. Another (higher) maximum negative sequence voltage level can be set above which a phase loss flag will be generated.AUTOMATIC LOGIC FUNCTIONS
Auto Sectionalizing: The Auto sectionalizing element provides a good mechanism to localize a fault by coordinating this function with the reclosing operations of the feeder breaker within a timing schedule. The logic implemented in this element provides a way to detect several reclosing actions from the main circuit breaker and accordingly open the local switch, in periods when the voltage is absent. The logic uses the information of the overcurrent condition followed by a loss of voltage, loss of current, power flow direction and voltage detection functions to execute the transition into internal states.CLP Cold load pickup: The CLP function is used to avoid fault detections under energizing or inrush conditions. The Cold Load pickup provides two different working ways: Time Block and Multiplier factor. When the CLP is programmed, the energizing process is detected by the transition from a ‘no voltage and no current’ state to a ‘voltage and current present’ condition.
Time Block selected: After a CLP condition is detected, the time overcurrent functions are blocked during the period of time programmed in CLP function.Multiplier factor selected: Each Overcurrent element is provided by a setting to indicate the factor at which the pickup threshold of the function shall be increased under inrush conditions. If the current magnitude measured is higher this setting, the element will operate.
![Page 15: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE DGCS CONTROLLERS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5
COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES
The DGC Switch Controller can measure/compute electrical quantities, detect the status of the grid equipment and produce various alarms and events. This information can be sent to the distribution center by means of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) communications. In addition, the DGCS can receive different status information and commands through the DNP.MEASUREMENTS
The measurements provided by DGCS are as follows:
The DGCS calculates the 3ph power based on currents from Wye connected CTs , and either voltage inputs from Wye connected PTs, or Delta connected PTs. In addition, two PTs or either only one PT can be used. The controller has to be configured for different PT connections in order to compute the 3ph power properly. The DGC Switch Controller provides DFT and RMS measurements. The internal metering process is executed at the internal frequency rate of 1 /4 of a full cycle.MONITORING AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The DGC Switch Controller is able to monitor the switch state based on auxiliary input 52a /52b provided by the feeder switch. Several external inputs for monitoring possible errors are also mounted on the switch:
- Low charge limit switch (LCL)- Spring Charge limit (SCL)- Disconnect Closed & Latched (DCL) - Open visual disconnect contact
These inputs can be used to inhibit any possible local and remote closing and opening commands to the feeder switch.The controller is able to monitor other external states as low battery conditions, high and low ambient temperature (if the order code included an RTD input card), etc.Maintenance ElementsThe maintenance elements provide alarms to the system based on:
• Maximum number of closing/opening executed commands per period of time
• I2t measurements per feeder.
On the Source side UNITS
-Ph-N and Ph-Ph Voltages.-Neutral Current-Phase Current-Positive Sequence Voltage-Negative Sequence Voltage-Zero Sequence Voltage -Positive Sequence Current-Negative Sequence Current-Zero Sequence Current -3Ph active Power-3Ph Reactive Power -3Ph Apparent Power-Power Factor-Frequency-THD Currents (up to 8th harmonic)-THD Voltage (up to 8th harmonic)
[V or kV]. (Secondary or primary)[A][A] [V][V][V][A][A][A][kW][kVAr][kVA]
[Hz]%%
On the Load side
-Ph-N and Ph-Ph Voltages. -Positive Sequence Voltage -Negative Sequence Voltage -Zero Sequence Voltage -THD Voltages (up to 8th harmonic)
[V or kV]. (Secondary or primary)-[V]-[V]-[V]-%
![Page 16: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
1–6 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF THE DGCS CONTROLLERS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Data LoggerThe DGCS provides data logger capabilities. The data logger stores the current and voltage measurements of three phases per feeder at every minute (the interval is configurable). It can also store the 3 Ph active and reactive power. A minimum of 72 hours should be stored for statistical features.There are two more buffers containing information over the largest current values reached.
• The largest value per hour is also stored in the ‘peak hourly register’. A minimum of 72 values should be stored for statistical features.
• The largest value per 72 hour is also stored in the ‘peak 72 hour register’ buffer.
Event RecorderThe DGCS can store up to 1024 consecutive events. Operate and dropout events of fault detection functions can be enabled or disabled by settings. A snapshot of the phase voltage/current and power metering can also be included and stored at each Event.Some of events and alarms include the following:
• Remote mode
• Local mode
• Remote/Manual Close command
• Remote/Manual Open Command
• switch opened/ closed / failed
• Overload events
• Overvoltage events
• Loss of voltage events
• Loss of current events
• High neutral current events
• Max number of closing reached.
• Battery Low
• Communications loss
• Internal error
Statistics and Counters
• Max / Min Values of current & voltage per hour.
• Max / Min Values of current & voltage per 72 hour.
• Daily close/open operation
• Total Close/open operation
![Page 17: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DGCS ORDER CODES
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7
DGCS Order Codes
Figure 3: Order Codes
Specifications
InputsPHASE CURRENT INPUTSRange: ......................................................................0.05 to 40 A primaryFrequency:..............................................................50 or 60 HzAccuracy: ................................................................±1.5% of reading or ±1.5% rated current (whichever is
greater)Input Type:..............................................................Combined 1A/5ARatio: .........................................................................1 to 2000 in steps of 1Resolution:..............................................................0.1 A
1 2 3 4 5 6DGC S E L S S A * * E * X * * X X X DescriptionApplication S I I I I I I I I I I I I Switch ControllerLanguage E I I I I I I I I I I I English (Standard)Power Supply L I I I I I I I I I I Low (20 to 60 V DC)Communication S I I I I I I I I I RS485 Modbus RTU / DNP3.0 (Standard)Options S I I I I I I I I Standard
I/O A I I I I I I I Current Input Card (1A/5A) - should be compatible with Lindsey Line current sensors o/p of 1A/5A)
B B I I I I I Voltage Input Card (110 ~ 300VAC) - should be compatible with Lindsey Line voltage sensors o/p of 120VAC
J J I I I I I Sensor Input Card (12V Lindsey Sensor)
E E E I I I Two (2) 10 A Form-A relays and six (6) 20 to 60V DC digital Inputs (2xIO_E Standard), Max 3xIO_E)
D I I I Four (4) 10A form-C relays (Optional, Max 1 IO_D)
G I I I 3 RTD (Only one used for DGC application (optional, Max 1 IO_G)
X X I I None
Controller Packaging 2 I Controller + Front Display Panel in an Enclosure for G&W Switch type ORA21-386-20RP
3 I Controller + Front Display Panel in an Enclosure for S&C Switch
Wireless Radio Option X None1 MDS TransNet (North American customers only)2 MDS iNet-II (North American customers only)
4 Prewired for future radio with 12 VDC Power Supply installed
5 Prewired for future radio with 24 VDC Power Supply installed
![Page 18: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
1–8 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTSInput Range:..........................................................60 to 440 V (IO_B card)Input Range:..........................................................0.5 to 10 V (IO_J card)Nominal Frequency: ..........................................50 or 60 HzAccuracy (IO_B card):........................................±1% of reading or ±1V (whichever is greater)Accuracy (IO_J card): ........................................±1% of reading or ±0.2V (whichever is greater)Ratio:.........................................................................1 to 10000 in steps of 1
PHASE OC, OV, AND UV TIME DELAYSRange: ......................................................................0.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 sAccuracy:................................................................up to ±0.3%
REVERSE POWER DELAYRange: ......................................................................0.0 to 3600.0 s in steps of 0.1 sAccuracy:................................................................up to ±0.2%
CONTACT INPUTSFixed Pickup: .........................................................65 V ACRecognition Time:...............................................2 cyclesCurrent Draw @ Rated Voltage:...................75 mA @ 120 V AC for 200 μs each cycle 60 mA @ 240 V AC
for 800 μs each cycleInput Impedance: ...............................................1.7 KOhmsNominal Frequency: ..........................................50 or 60 HzType: .........................................................................opto-isolatedExternal Switch:...................................................wet contactMaximum Input Voltage:.................................300 V AC
OutputsOUTPUT RELAYSConfiguration: ...................................................... electromechanical form A (IO_C) and form C (IO_D)Contact Material: ................................................ silver alloyOperate Time: ......................................................10 msMinimum Contact Load:..................................10 mA @ 5 V DCContinuous Current: ..........................................10 AMake and Carry for 0.2 s: ................................30 A per ANSI C37.90Mechanical Life: ..................................................10 000 000 operations
FORM C OUTPUT CONTACTSAC Resistive, 120 V AC: .....................................10 A normally open, 5 A normally closedAC Resistive, 240 V AC: .....................................10 A normally open, 8 A normally closedAC Inductive, PF = 0.4 pilot duty: .................2.5 ADC Resistive, 30 V DC: .......................................10 A
ConfigurationPHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENTCurrent:.................................................................... FundamentalPickup Level: .........................................................0.05 - 8.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CTDropout Level: ......................................................95 to 98% of Pickup or ±0.02 x CT (whichever is greater)Time Delay:............................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01Operate Time: ......................................................<25 ms.@ (I > 1.5 x Pickup level)Level Accuracy:....................................................±1% at rated current±3% for current higher than 0.1x CTTiming Accuracy: ................................................±3% of trip time or ±20ms (whichever is greater)
![Page 19: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9
PHASE TIMED OVERCURRENTCurrent: ....................................................................FundamentalPickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 8.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CTDropout Level: ......................................................95 to 98% of Pickup or ±0.02 x CT (whichever is greater)Time Delay: ............................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01Operate Time:.......................................................<25 ms.@ (I > 1.5 x Pickup level)Level Accuracy: ....................................................±1% at rated current±3% for current higher than 0.1x CTTiming Accuracy: ................................................±3% of trip time or ±20ms (whichever is greater)
NEUTRAL OVERCURRENTNeutral Current: ...................................................FundamentalPickup Level:..........................................................0.05 - 8.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT (phase CT)Dropout Level: ......................................................95 to 98% of Pickup or ±0.02 x CT (whichever is greater)Time Delay: ............................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01Operate Time:.......................................................<25 ms.@ (I > 1.5 x Pickup level, no time delay)Level Accuracy: ....................................................±1% at rated current±3% for current higher than 0.1x CTTiming Accuracy: ................................................+0.25cycle (0 s time delay)±3% of trip time or 0.25cycle
whichever is greater (intentional delay)
PHASE OVERVOLTAGEPickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Dropout Level: ......................................................95% to 99% of pickup (V > 0.1 x VT)85% to 99% of pickup (V
< 0.1 x VT)Time Delay: ............................................................0.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1Operate Time:.......................................................time delay + up to 35 ms.@ 60Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)time delay +
up to 40 ms.@ 50Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)Level Accuracy: ....................................................per voltage input
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEMinimum Voltage:...............................................programmable from 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Pickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Dropout Level: ......................................................101% to 104% of pickup (V > 0.1 x VT)101% to 115% of
pickup (V < 0.1 x VT)OperateTime:........................................................Time Delay ± 30 ms @ 60Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)Time Delay: ............................................................± 40 ms @50Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)Time Delay Accuracy: .......................................±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greaterLevel Accuracy: ....................................................per voltage input
VOLTAGE UNBALANCEPickup Level:..........................................................4 to 40% in steps of 1%Time Delay: ............................................................1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 sDropout Level: ......................................................(pickup – 0.2 to 2 units)%Pickup Accuracy:.................................................±2%Timing Accuracy: ................................................±0.5 s or ± 0.5% of total time
POWER LOSSOperate Time:.......................................................time delay + up to 35 ms @ 60Hz (V > 1.1 x PKPtime delay +
up to 40 ms @ 50Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)Time Delay Accuracy: .......................................0 to 1 cycleLevel Accuracy: ....................................................per voltage inputVoltage:....................................................................FundamentalPickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 0.40 x VT in steps of 0.01Dropout Level: ......................................................101% to 104% of pickup (V > 0.1 xVT)101% to 115% of
pickup (V < 0.1 xVT)Current: ....................................................................FundamentalPickup Level:..........................................................0.0 to 0.40 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CTDropout Level: ......................................................102 to 105% of Pickup or ±0.02xCT (whichever is greater)
![Page 20: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
1–10 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
AUTO SECTIONALIZINGIOC Dropout Time Delay: ................................0.05 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01sTrip Count Limit: ..................................................1 to 5 in steps of 1Auto Sectionalizing Delay:..............................0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1sReverse Power Pickup: .....................................0 to –50000 in steps of 1 kWReverse Power Delay: .......................................0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1sAuto Sectionalizing Timeout: ........................6 to 600 s in steps of 1s
SWITCH WEARING MONITOROpen Counter Limit: ..........................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1Close Counter Limit: ..........................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1KI2t Maximum Limit: .........................................0 to 9999.99 (KA)2s in steps of 0.01 (KA)2sKI2t Integral Time:..............................................0.03 to 0.25 s in steps of 0.01 s
Power supplyPOWER SUPPLYNominal:..................................................................120 to 240 V AC
125 to 250 V DCRange: ......................................................................60 to 300 V AC (50 and 60 Hz)
84 to 250 V DCRide Through: .......................................................35 msOvervoltage Withstand: ..................................2 x highest nominal voltage for 10 msPower Consumption:.........................................16 W typical, 45 W maximum
FusesFUSES USEDInternal Voltage Source:.................................. FUSE 3A/250V 1/4" X 1-1/4" CARTRIDGEGE P/N: 0901-0015,
COPPER BUSHMANN P/N: AGC-3Switch Mechanism:............................................ FUSE FAST ACTING 6.3MMX32.0MM 250V 6AGE P/N: 0901-
0086, COPPER BUSHMANN P/N: AGC-6-R
BatteryBATTERYManufacturer: ......................................................OdysseyManufacturer’s P/N: ..........................................PC310Description: ...........................................................BATTERY DRY CELL 101X86X138MM 12V 8AH HIGH_TEMP
M4_RECEPTACLE
BATTERY BACKUPVoltage: ...................................................................24 VDC (two 12 V batteries)Capacity:.................................................................8 hoursCharging: ................................................................Constantly connected to a smart charging unitAlarms:..................................................................... LED and alarm messagesBattery Test: ..........................................................Programmable through system setup menu
CAUTION: Replace battery with the same model and type . When replacing ensure the metal cover is reused to harness the batteries. Ensure that the rubber battery terminal covers are reused to prevent accidental short circuits.
CommunicationsCOMMUNICATIONSData Transfer Rate: ...........................................9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bits per secondCommunication Protocols:.............................DNP 3, Modbus
![Page 21: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11
Testing and Certification
APPROVALS
Applicable Council Directive According to
CE compliance Low voltage directive EN60255-5 / EN60255-27
EMC Directive EN61000-6-2 / 6-4 / 6-5 (AREA G)
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality program
ISO9001
TYPE TESTS
Test Reference Standard Test Level
Dielectric Voltage Withstand EN60255-5 2.3KV
Impulse Voltage Withstand EN60255-5 5KV
Insulation Resistance Test EN60255-5 500 VDC
Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1 2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
Electrostatic Discharge EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2 Level 4
RF Immunity EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge Immunity EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5 Level 3 & 4
Conducted RF Immunity EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6 Level 3
Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
Siesmic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Power Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
Voltage Dip & interruption IEC61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips, 250/300 cycle interrupts
Environmental (Cold) IEC60068-2-1 -20C 16 hrs
Environmental (Cold Storage) IEC60068-2-1 -40C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat) IEC60068-2-2 85C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6day variant 2
RF Immunity IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2 20V/m 80-1Ghz
![Page 22: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
1–12 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Environmental
AccuracyMETERING ACCURACYVoltages: .................................................................0.5% (60 to 300 V)Load Current:........................................................0.5% (0.2 to 1.5 x CT)Harmonics: ............................................................up to 8th
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ambient temperatures:
Storage/shipping: - 40oC to 90oC *
Operating: -40oC to 60oC *
* Internal temperature cannot exceed 60oC. This product is capable of operating in a maximum ambient of 40oC including solar loading.
Humidity: Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55oC (As per IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6days)
Altitude: 2000m (max)
Insulation Category: I
Overvoltage Category: II
Ingress Protection: IP54
Environmental rating: 60oC surrounding air
Pollution Degree: II
Type 1 (panel mount versions only)
![Page 23: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 2: Installation
Installation
![Page 24: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
2–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Mechanical installation
Figure 1: DGCS dimensions
16.28[413]
14.28[363]
20.06[510]
10.20[259]
.44[11]
TYP 4
1.50[38]TYP 4
TYP.5514[ ]
23.00[584]
GROUND STUD#5/16-18
Legend
Meters [inches]
![Page 25: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–3
Option 1 shows the connection available for the S & C switch.
Figure 2: Bottom view for S & C switch
Option 2 shows the connections available for the G & W switch.
Figure 3: Bottom view for G & W switch
OPTION 1
OPTION 2
![Page 26: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
2–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Electrical installation
Figure 4: S & C Switch Controller wiring diagram - 3 CT Wye / 3 PTs Wye
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G1
0
G1
1
G1
2
G1
3
G1
4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CO
M-
+
RS
48
5
GN
D
PO
WE
RS
UP
PLY
DG
C-
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LLE
R
RS
23
2R
S4
85
CO
NV
ER
TER
POWER
-+U
SB
RJ4
5FR
ON
TP
OR
T
FAC
EP
LATE
RJ4
5FR
ON
TP
OR
T
POWER
-+C
OM
-+
RS
23
2
MD
SIN
ET
IIR
AD
IO
SU
RG
EA
RR
ES
TOR
AC
INP
UT-+
24
V
RJ4
5
89
18
01
.cd
r
WYE
PTs
RTD
A B C
WYE
CTs
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F9 F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
WYE
PTs
CB
CO
NTR
OLS
CIR
CU
ITB
RE
AK
ER
FEE
DE
RS
WIT
CH
(SW
)
SO
UR
CE
SID
EL
OA
DS
IDE
IO_G
(op
tio
na
l)
IO_A
IO_B or
IO_J
IO_E
1
IO_B
(op
tio
na
l)o
rIO
_J(o
pti
on
al)
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LS
SW
inp
ut
CLO
SE
SW
inp
ut
OP
EN
SW
52
aco
nta
ctS
W5
2b
con
tact
LN
G
FUS
E3
A1
20
V,6
0H
z
Ste
p-d
ow
nTr
an
sfo
rme
r
OP
TIO
NA
L
DC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
AC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
BA
TTE
RY
BA
CK
UP
SY
STE
M
IO_E
2-
+
![Page 27: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–5
Figure 5: S & C Switch Controller wiring diagram - 3 CT Wye / 3 PTs Open Delta
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G1
0
G1
1
G1
2
G1
3
G1
4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CO
M-
+
RS
48
5
GN
D
PO
WE
RS
UP
PLY
DG
C-
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LLE
R
RS
23
2R
S4
85
CO
NV
ER
TER
POWER
-+U
SB
RJ4
5FR
ON
TP
OR
T
FAC
EP
LATE
RJ4
5FR
ON
TP
OR
T
POWER
-+C
OM
-+
RS
23
2
MD
SIN
ET
IIR
AD
IO
SU
RG
EA
RR
ES
TOR
AC
INP
UT-+
24
V
RJ4
5
89
18
02
.cd
r
Op
De
lta
PTs
RTD
A B C
WYE
CTs
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F9 F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
CB
CO
NTR
OLS
CIR
CU
ITB
RE
AK
ER
FEE
DE
RS
WIT
CH
(SW
)
SO
UR
CE
SID
EL
OA
DS
IDE
IO_G
(op
tio
na
l)
IO_A
IO_B or
IO_J
IO_E
1
IO_B
(op
tio
na
l)o
rIO
_J(o
pti
on
al)
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LS
SW
inp
ut
CLO
SE
SW
inp
ut
OP
EN
SW
52
aco
nta
ctS
W5
2b
con
tact
LN
G
FUS
E3
A1
20
V,6
0H
z
Ste
p-d
ow
nTr
an
sfo
rme
r
OP
TIO
NA
L
DC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
AC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
BA
TTE
RY
BA
CK
UP
SY
STE
M
IO_E
2-
+
Op
De
lta
PTs
![Page 28: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
2–6 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 6: G&W Switch Controller wiring diagram - 3 CT Wye / 3 PTs Wye
D1D2
D3D4
D5D6
D7D8
G1 G2
G3
G4
G5 G6
G7
G8
G9
G10 G11 G12
G13
G14
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
COM
-+
RS48
5
GN
D
POW
ER S
UPP
LY
DGC
- SW
ITCH
CO
NTR
OLL
ER
RS23
2RS
485
CON
VERT
ERPOWER
-+U
SBRJ
45FR
ON
T PO
RT
FACE
PLAT
E
RJ45
FRO
NT
PORT
POWER
-+CO
M-
+
RS23
2
MDS
INET
II R
ADIO
SURG
EAR
REST
OR
AC IN
PUT-+
24V
RJ45
8918
04.c
dr
WYE
PTs
RTD
C1C2
C3C4
C5C6
C7C8
E1E2
E3E4
E5E6
E7E8
F9 F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
WYE
PTs
IO_G
(opt
iona
l)
IO_A
IO_B or IO_J
IO_E
1
IO_B
(opt
iona
l)or
IO_J
(opt
iona
l)
SWIT
CHCO
NTR
OLS
SWIT
CH i
nput
CLO
SE
LN
G
FUSE
3A
120V
, 60H
z
Step
-dow
nTr
ansf
orm
er
OPT
ION
AL
DC/D
CCo
nver
tor
AC/D
CCo
nver
tor
BATT
ERY
BACK
UP
SYST
EM
IO_E
2-
+
SWIT
CH i
nput
CLO
SESW
ITCH
inp
utO
PEN
SWIT
CH i
nput
OPE
N
SWIT
CH o
utpu
tLO
GAS
SW 5
2aco
ntac
t
SW 5
2bco
nta
![Page 29: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–7
Figure 7: G & W Switch Controller wiring diagram - 3 CT Wye / 3 PTs Open Delta
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G1
0
G1
1
G1
2
G1
3
G1
4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CO
M-
+
RS
48
5
GN
D
PO
WE
R S
UP
PLY
DG
C -
SW
ITC
H C
ON
TRO
LLE
R
RS
23
2R
S4
85
CO
NV
ER
TER
POWER
-+U
SB
RJ4
5FR
ON
T P
OR
T
FAC
EP
LATE
RJ4
5FR
ON
T P
OR
TPOWER
-+C
OM
-+
RS
23
2
MD
S IN
ET
II R
AD
IO
SU
RG
EA
RR
ES
TOR
AC
INP
UT-+
24
V
RJ4
5
89
18
05
.cd
r
RTD
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F9 F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
IO_G
(op
tio
na
l)
IO_A
IO_B or
IO_J
IO_E
1
IO_B
(op
tio
na
l)o
rIO
_J (o
pti
on
al)
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LS
LN
G
FUS
E 3
A1
20
V, 6
0H
z
Ste
p-d
ow
nTr
an
sfo
rme
r
OP
TIO
NA
L
DC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
AC
/DC
Co
nve
rto
r
BA
TTE
RY
BA
CK
UP
SY
STE
M
IO_E
2-
+
SW
ITC
HC
ON
TRO
LS
SW
ITC
H i
np
ut
CLO
SE
SW
ITC
H i
np
ut
CLO
SE
SW
ITC
H i
np
ut
OP
EN
SW
ITC
H i
np
ut
OP
EN
SW
ITC
H o
utp
ut
LO G
AS
SW
52
aco
nta
ct
SW
52
bco
nta
ct
![Page 30: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
2–8 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
![Page 31: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 3: Interfaces
Interfaces
Front Control Panel Interface
The DGC Switch Controller front panel provides easy navigation using full keypad pushbuttons, conveniently located open/close control pushbuttons, quick access to settings, regulation transparency using LED indicators, and a 4 x 20 character Liquid Crystal Display. The front panel includes the following components:
![Page 32: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
3–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Figure 1: DGCS Front Panel
DGCS STATUS LEDs: Three LEDs indicating the DGCS status: “In-Service”, “Alarm”, and (communications) “Comms OK” are placed in the upper left corner of the DGCS front panel.
![Page 33: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–3
4 X 20 CHARACTER LCDThe DGCS has an LCD with 4 lines of 20 characters, that allows visibility under varied lighting conditions. When the keypad and the display are not being used, system information is displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the keypad when the screen shows the default display returns the display to the last available message before the default screen activated. Any DGCS control actions, as well as element operations, are displayed automatically, overriding any target message displayed at that time. The display and the navigation keypad are conveniently located to provide the user easy access to any settings, actual values, status, monitoring tools, or statistics.
NOTE
NOTE: Pressing any of the Quick Settings pushbuttons, invokes only the settings programmed in the active Settings Group. Accessing and editing of settings from the other Settings Groups can be done using the navigation keypad pushbuttons.
SWITCH CONTROLLER CONTROL PANELThe Switch Controller control panel includes the following pushbuttons:
Figure 2: Switch Controller Control Panel
Working with the KeypadThe display messages are organized into a Main Menu, pages, and sub-pages. There are four main menus labeled Actual Values, Quick Setup, Settings, and Maintenance. Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu headers, which appear in sequence as follows:
IN SERVICE: The DGCS is operational and functioning properly when the “In-Service” LED shows green. The LED turns off upon detection of an internal firmware or hardware error. The product is not programmed when shipped, and the “In-Service” LED will not light upon power up. The LED will turn on green upon selecting the “Ready” setting under the S1 INSTALLATION/PRODUCT STATUS menu.
ALARM: The “Alarm” LED turns orange upon detection of either an internal firmware error, a hardware error, or upon ALARM conditions driven by the control of the configuration elements such as “phase IOC” or “phase TOC”.
COMMS OK: The communications LED, is a bi-color LED, meaning that it will show green when the transmit/receive channels are set and the DGCS is communicating with another smart device or SCADA. This LED will turn orange if the communication channels – communication card failure, or communication channels - are not working properly.
![Page 34: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
3–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Figure 3: The four Main Menu headers
Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display the corresponding menu Page. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through the Page headers.
Figure 4: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection
When the display shows SETTINGS, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as settings in the manual). When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual values in the manual). Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. A summary of the settings and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Settings and Actual Values, respectively.The ENTER key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered setting values into memory to complete the change. The MESSAGE ► key can also be used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered settings.
█ ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
█ CLOCK
A1 STATUS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
█
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
A3 RECORDS
█
CONTACT INPUTS
A1 STATUS
OUTPUT RELAYS
CLOCK
█
A1 STATUS
ACTIVE GROUP
.
.
.
2 clicks
▽
△
▶
▶
▼
◁ ▷
▼▼
◁ ▷
Click to end
▼Back
Back
Back 1 click
![Page 35: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–5
The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a setting change. The MESSAGE ◄ key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel setting changes.The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setting. They also decrement and increment numerical settings. The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. This includes resetting latched output relays, latched Trip LEDs, breaker operation failure, and trip / close coil failures. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to zero and the lockout condition being cleared.The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay. Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring elements that are picked up, operating, or latched.
LED Status IndicatorsThe DGC Switch Controller faceplate provides easy navigation through a set of keypad pushbuttons, conveniently located switch control pushbuttons, regulation transparency through LED indicators, and a 4 by 20 character Liquid Crystal Display. The faceplate includes the following LED components:
• IN SERVICE: Green
The DGCS is operational and functions properly when the “In Service” LED is lit green. The LED turns off upon detection of an internal firmware or hardware error. The product is not programmed when shipped, and the “In-Service” LED will not light upon power-up. The LED will turn green upon selecting the setting “Ready” under the S1 INSTALLATION > PRODUCT STATUS menu.
• ALARM: Orange
The “Alarm” LED turns orange upon detection of either an internal firmware error, a hardware error, or upon alarm conditions driven by configuration elements such as “Phase IOC” or “Phase TOC”.
• COMMS OK: Green/Orange
The communications LED is a bi-color LED; it will light green when the transmit/ receive channels are set and the DGCS is communicating with another smart device or SCADA. The LED will turn red if the communication channels – because of communication card failure or communication channels not working properly – are no longer functioning.
• AUTO SECTIONALIZING LOCKOUT: Red
The "Auto Sectionalizing Lockout” LED turns red when the Auto Sectionalizing element is in a lockout state.
• BLOCK OPEN SWITCH: Orange
This LED is not labeled, but it is located next to the “Block Open Switch” pushbutton. It is lit when the OPEN SWITCH command is blocked.
• BLOCK CLOSE SWITCH: Orange
This LED is not labeled, but it is located next to the “Block Close Switch” pushbutton. It is lit when the CLOSE SWITCH command is blocked.
• PHASE OVERCURRENT: Orange
The “Phase Overcurrent” LED operation is connected with the Phase Time Overcurrent and Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent elements. The LED is lit when either or both of these elements are operating.
• NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT: Orange
The “Neutral Overcurrent” LED is lit when the Neutral Overcurrent element is operating.
![Page 36: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
3–6 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
• OVERVOLTAGE: Orange
The “Overvoltage” LED is lit when the Overvoltage element is operating.
• UNDERVOLTAGE: Orange
The “Undervoltage” LED is lit when the Undervoltage element is operating.
• REVERSE POWER: Orange
The “Reverse Power” LED is lit when there is a reverse power condition detected in the monitored power grid.
• SWITCH OPEN: Green/Red/Orange
The “Switch Open” LED is lit when the controlled switch is open. The color of the LED is configurable and can be set to Green, Red or Orange. Factory default is Red.
• SWITCH CLOSED: Green/Red/Orange
The “Switch Closed” LED is lit when the controlled switch is closed. The color of the LED is configurable and can be set to Green, Red or Orange. Factory default is Green.
• SWITCH ALARM: Orange
This LED lights up orange when any of the following three events occur: The switch is not detected closed after the expected time, the switch is not detected open after the expected time, or the system cannot determine the state of the switch.
• AC POWER LOSS: Orange
This LED lights up orange when the system detects a power loss condition on the source side of the switch.
• BATTERY ALARM: Orange
This LED is lit steadily if the battery fuse is blown or the battery needs to be replaced. It flashes while the battery test is in progress.
• AUTO: Green
The DGCS is in Auto mode when the “Auto” LED is lit green. The outputs are controlled by automatic functions running on the controller. The LED blinks while the Auto mode is blocked by a remote (SCADA) user.
• MANUAL: Green
The DGCS is in Manual mode when the “Manual” LED is lit green. The DGCS outputs are controlled by MANUAL commands.
• REMOTE: Green
The DGCS is in Remote mode when the “Remote” LED is lit green. The DGCS is then being controlled from a remote location.
• LOCAL: Red
The DGCS is in Local mode when the “Local” LED is lit red. The DGCS can then only be controlled by a user who has access to the faceplate commands.
Software Setup
EnerVista DGCS Setup SoftwareAlthough settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys, a PC can be used to download settings through the communications port. The software is available from GE Digital Energy to make this as convenient as possible. With running, it is possible to:
• Program and modify settings
![Page 37: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–7
• Load and save setting files to and from a disk
• Read actual values
• Monitor status
• Read pre-trip data and event records
• Get help on any topic
• Upgrade the firmware
The software allows immediate access to all features with easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. This section provides the necessary information to install , upgrade the relay firmware, and write and edit setting files.The software can run even if the DGCS is not connected to the computer. In this case, settings may be saved to a file for future use. If the DGCS is connected to a PC and communications are enabled, the DGCS can be programmed from the setting screens. In addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed on the actual value screens.
Hardware andSoftware
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for the software.
• Microsoft Windows™ 7 / XP is installed and running properly.
• At least 100 MB of hard disk space is available.
• At least 256 MB of RAM is available.
The software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the GE Digital Energy website at http://www.gedigitalenergy.com.
Installing theEnerVista DGCSSetup Software
After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to install the EnerVista DGCS Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software on the local PC.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
5. In the EnerVista Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the DGC Switch Controller as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the DGCS.
![Page 38: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
3–8 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
6. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation process. A status window with a progress bar will be shown during the downloading process.
7. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista DGCS Setup software will be installed.
8. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated, the USB driver will be loaded into the computer, and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista DGCS Setup software to the Windows start menu.
9. The DGCS device (DA Setup) will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.
![Page 39: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–9
If you are going to communicate from your computer to the Relay using the USB port:
10. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the Relay then into the USB port on your computer.
11. Launch Enervista DA Setup from LaunchPad by double-clicking the DA Setup icon.
12. In EnerVista > Device Setup:
![Page 40: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
3–10 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
13. Select USB as the Interface type.
14. Select DGCS as the USB device.
Connecting EnerVista DGCS Setup to the Device
Configuring SerialCommunications
Before starting, verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device (for RS485 communications). This example demonstrates a USB connection. For RS485 communications, the Multilin F485 converter will be required. Refer to the F485 manual for additional details.
1. Install and start the latest version of the software (available from the GE Digital Energy web site). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site name.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the window.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the device.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list.
![Page 41: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–11
8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the device and upload the order code.
9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main window.
The Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. Proceed to Connecting to the DGCS below, to begin communications.
Using the QuickConnect Feature
The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel USB port of a DGC device. The following window will appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:
As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the software to a front port if a USB is selected in the interface drop-down list. Select a device and press the Connect button. When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window.
![Page 42: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
3–12 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
The DGC Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for USB communications. Proceed to Connecting to the DGCS, below, to begin communications.
Connecting to theDGCS
Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can easily communicate with the device.
1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to list the available devices for the given site.
2. Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of headers is shown for each device:Device DefinitionActual ValuesQuick SetupSettingsMaintenance.
3. Expand the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open the "Front Panel" settings window as shown below:
![Page 43: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–13
4. The "Front Panel" settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista DGCS Setup window.
5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial or USB cable is properly connected to the relay, and that the device has been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier).
The "Front Panel" settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other settings and command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values" windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.
Working with Settings and Settings Files
Engaging a Device The EnerVista DGCS Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a DGC device. Communicating devices are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of devices selected from the product series.
Entering Settings The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of settings. In this example, we will be changing the voltage sensing settings.
1. Establish communications with the DGC device.
![Page 44: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
3–14 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
2. Select the Settings > System Setup > Source Side VTs menu item.
3. Select the Settings > System Setup > Load Side VTs menu item.
4. Select the Source or Load VT Ratio or Secondary settings by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value and another to launch the numerical keypad.
5. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that allows the user to enter a value within the setting range displayed near the top of the keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from the keypad and retain the old value.
![Page 45: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–15
6. For settings requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Load VT Connection below), clicking anywhere within the Load VT parameter box displays a drop-down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.
7. For settings requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "product name"), the value may be entered directly within the settings Parameter box.
8. In the above Settings > System Setup > Load Side VTs dialog box, click on Save to save the values into the relay. Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.
File Support Opening any file will automatically launch the application or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘DGC’ extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree.New files will be automatically added to the tree.
Using Settings Files The software interface supports three ways of handling changes to DGCS settings:
• In off-line mode (DGC disconnected) to create or edit DGC settings files for later download to communicating DGC devices.
• Directly modifying DGC settings while connected to a communicating DGC device, then saving the settings when complete.
• Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating DGC device, then saving them to the device when complete.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of DGC settings:
• Device Definition
• DGC Setup
• System Setup
• Control
• Inputs/Outputs
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.The displays DGC settings with the same hierarchy as the front panel display.
Downloading andSaving Settings Files
Settings must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Saving settings is also highly recommended before making any settings changes or creating new settings files.The settings files in the window are accessed in the Files Window. Use the following procedure to download and save settings files to a local PC.
1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured as shown in Connecting to the DGCS, above.
2. Select the desired device from the site list.
![Page 46: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
3–16 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
3. Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the device.
4. After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and destination path of the settings file. The corresponding file extension will be automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setting file.
Adding Settings Filesto the Environment
The software provides the capability to review and manage a large group of settings files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1. In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as shown:
2. The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved settings file. As for any other MS Windows® application, browse for the file to be added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.
Creating a NewSettings File
The software allows the user to create new settings files independent of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a device at a later date. The following procedure illustrates how to create new settings files.
![Page 47: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–17
1. In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the settings file for the correct firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that settings not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the device.
2. Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new settings file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device and the purpose of the file.
4. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name box.
5. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to replace an existing file. All settings files should have the extension ‘DGC’ (for example, ‘feeder1.DGC’).
6. Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a complete path, will be added to the EnerVista DGCS Setup software environment.
Upgrading SettingsFiles to a New
Revision
It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved settings file after the firmware has been upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware Revision.
3. Load the settings file to be upgraded into the EnerVista DGCS Setup environment as described in the section, Adding Settings Files to the Environment.
4. In the File pane, select the saved settings file.
5. From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and note the File Version of the settings file. If this version is different from the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a New File Version that matches the Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu.
![Page 48: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
3–18 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
6. For example, if the firmware revision is 1.20) and the current settings file revision is 1.10, change the settings file revision to “1.2x”.
7. Enter any special comments about the settings file in the "Description" field.
8. Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field.
9. When complete, click OK to convert the settings file to the desired revision. See Loading Settings from a File below, for instructions on loading this settings file into the DGCS device.
Printing Settings andActual Values
The EnerVista DGCS Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of settings and Actual Values. Use the following procedure to print a list of settings:
1. Select a previously saved settings file in the File pane or establish communications with a device.
2. From the main window, select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item.
![Page 49: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–19
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
4. The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above.
5. Settings lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options.
Printing Actual Valuesfrom a Connected
Device
A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the desired device.
2. From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
Actual Values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option.
![Page 50: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
3–20 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Loading Settings froma File
FASTPATH: The following procedure illustrates how to load settings from a file. Before loading a settings file, it must first be added to the environment as described in the section, Adding Settings Files to the Environment.
1. Select the previously saved settings file from the File pane of the EnerVista DGCS Setup software main window.
2. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target device. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Settings Files to a New Revision for details on changing the settings file version.
3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4. Select the target device from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an incompatibility, an "Incompatible device..." error message will be shown.
An error message will occur when attempting to download a settings file with a revision number that does not match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the settings file, see for instructions on changing the revision number of a settings file. If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data will be transferred to the device. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main window.
Upgrading DGCS firmwareTo upgrade the DGCS firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful completion of this procedure, the device will have new firmware installed with the factory default settings.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Digital Energy website at http://www.digitalenergy.com.
NOTE
NOTE: EnerVista DGCS Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a DGC device.
FASTPATH: Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current DGCS settings to a file on your PC. After the firmware has been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back into the device. Refer to Downloading and Saving Settings Files for details on saving settings to a file.
Loading new DGCfirmware
Loading new firmware into the flash memory is accomplished as follows:
1. Connect the device to the local PC and save the settings to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Settings Files.
2. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item.
3. The software will request the new firmware file. Locate the folder that contains the firmware files to load into the relay. The firmware filename has the following format:
MJ M03 M A 100 . 000
Modification Number (000 = none)
Board Assembly Rev #
Code Type in Memory Device
PCB Code Number
Product Reference Code (MJ = DGC)
Firmware Rev #
![Page 51: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–21
4. EnerVista DGCS Setup software now prepares the to receive the new firmware file. The front panel will momentarily display "DGC BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for Message,” indicating that it is in upload mode.
5. While the file is being loaded into the device, a status box appears showing how much of the new firmware file has been transferred, and the upgrade status. The entire transfer process takes approximately 10 minutes.
6. The software will notify the user when the EnerVista DGCS Setup program has finished loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the main screen. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.
After successfully updating the firmware, the device will not be in service and will require settings programming. To communicate with the relay, the communication settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.When communications are established, the saved settings must be reloaded back into the device. See Loading Settings from a File for details.Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of the firmware.Addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
Advanced EnerVista DGCS Setup features
Event records The EnerVista DGCS Setup software can be used to capture events from the device at the instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
• With EnerVista DGCS Setup software running and communications established, select the Actual Values > A3 Records > Event Records menu item to open the Event Records Viewer window.
![Page 52: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
3–22 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
• Click on the Save Events button to save the selected events to the local PC.
Data logger The data logger feature is used to sample and record up to ten actual values at a selectable interval. The datalogger can be run with Continuous mode Enabled, which will continuously record samples until stopped by the user; or with Continuous mode Disabled, which will trigger the datalog once without overwriting previous data.Viewing and saving of the Datalogger is performed as follows:
1. With running and communications established, select the A3 Records > Data Logger menu item to open the datalog setup window:
![Page 53: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–23
2. If Continuous mode is enabled, click on Stop to stop the datalog
3. Click on the Save to File button to save the datalog to the local PC. A new window will appear requesting for file name and path.
4. One file is saved as a COMTRADE file, with the extension ‘CFG’. The other file is a DAT file, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of data.
5. To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the corresponding COMTRADE file.
6. To view the datalog, click the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Datalog window will appear as shown below.
![Page 54: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
3–24 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
7. The datalog can be set to capture another buffer by clicking on Run (when Continuous mode is enabled), or by clicking on Release (when Continuous mode is disabled).
Password security Password security is an optional feature of the DGCS which can be setup using the EnerVista DGCS Setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a hierarchy for centralized management. This is accomplished through a Master level access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher level privileged operations. In cases where operational security is required as well as a central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged. The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the EnerVista setup software. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. For more details on the password security feature, refer to Chapter 6 - Password Security.
1. DGCS devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. If the password security feature is to be used, the user must first change the Master Reset Password from the initial Null setting. This can be done only over communications, not from the front panel keypad. The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
Display graph values
at the corresponding
cursor line. Cursor
lines are identified by
their colors.
CURSOR
LINES
To move lines locate the mouse pointer
over the cursor line then click and drag
the cursor to the new location.
DELTA
Indicates time difference
between the two cursor lines
TRIGGER LINE
Indicates the
point in time for
the trigger
FILE NAME
Indicates the
file name and
complete path
(if saved)
TRIGGER TIME & DATE
Display the time & date of the
Trigger
VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT
Click here to open a new graph
to display vectors
CURSOR LINE POSITION
Indicate the cursor line position
in time with respect to the
trigger time
![Page 55: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–25
characters in length, and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. The letters are case sensitive. After entering a valid Master Reset Password, enter the new Master Reset Password again to confirm, then select Change Password.
2. Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed, enter it again to log in to the Master Access level. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local Passwords. If the Master Reset Password has been lost, record the Encrypted Key and contact the factory to have it decrypted.
3. With Master Level access, the user may disable password security altogether, or change the Master Reset Password.
4. The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Settings and Remote Control passwords. These passwords are initially set to a Null value, and can only be set or changed from a remote user over RS485 communications. Remote Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
![Page 56: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
3–26 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
5. Initial setup of the Local Settings and Local Control passwords requires the Master Access level. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES, Local passwords can be changed remotely only (over RS485). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to NO, Local Passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). If changing Local Passwords is permitted locally, the keypad user can only change the Local Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. Local Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
6. If any Remote Password has never been set, that level will not be attainable except when logged in as the Master Level. The same logic applies to the Local Passwords.
7. When passwords have been set, the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate password depending on the interface being used (remote or local), and the nature of the change being made (settings or control). If the correct password is entered, the user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. The access level turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity, if control power is cycled, or if the user enters an incorrect password.
![Page 57: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 4: Actual values
Actual values
A2 METERING
CURRENT
CURRENT SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE SOURCE
VOLTAGE LOAD
VOLTAGE SRC SEQ
POWER
FREQUENCY
THD
HARMONICS
ENERGY
▼
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
FLEXLOGIC SUMMARY
RTDs
▼
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
A3 RECORDS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
891961.cdr
A3 RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
DATA LOGGER
CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR DATA LOGGER
▼
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
PhIOC Operate
State: BLOCK
PH
SW Command
State: Open
▼
▼ ASE A,B,C
![Page 58: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
4–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A1 Status
The main Status Menu is shown below:
Figure 1: Status menu
Contact inputsPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 1 to 12OFF
Range: Off, On
Message displays the state of the contact input. The message “ON” indicates that the contact input is energized, and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact.
A1 CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 1
CONTACT INPUT 2
...
CONTACT INPUT n
▼
A1 CLOCK
CURRENT DATE
CURRENT TIME
▼
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
FLEXLOGIC SUMMARY
RTDs
▼
891863.cdr
A1 OUTPUT RELAYS
OUTPUT RELAY 1
...
OUTPUT RELAY 2
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 6
▼
A1 FLEXLOGIC SUMMARY
FLEXLOGIC STATUS
FLEX LINES USED
▼
A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS
1
2
...
32
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT
▼
A1 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
1
2
...
32
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
▼
RLY 1 OFF RLY 5 OFF
RLY 2 OFF RLY 6 OFF
RLY 3 OFF
RLY 4 OFF
CI 1 OFF CI 5 OFF
CI 2 OFF CI 6 OFF
CI 3 OFF CI 7 OFF
CI 4 OFF CI 8 OFF
Contact Inputs Summary
Output Relays Summary
NOTE: # of outputs dependson ordercode
NOTE: # of inputs dependson ordercode
A1 RTDs
RTD#1
RTD#2
RTD#3
NOTE: these valuesare shown only if anIO_G card is installed
![Page 59: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–3
ClockPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK
CURRENT DATEFeb 12 2009
Range: Date in format shown
Indicates today’s date.
CURRENT TIME09:17:12
Range: Time in format shown
Indicates the current time of day.
Output relaysPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY 1 SW OPEN (Output Relay #1)OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (OPEN) shows that an OPEN command has been sent to the breaker.
RLY 2 SW CLOSE (Output Relay #2)OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (CLOSE) shows that a close command has been sent to the breaker.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to X (Auxiliary Output Relays)OFF
Range: Off, On
Virtual inputsThe state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32OFF
Range: Off, On
Virtual outputsThe state of all active virtual outputs is displayed here. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
![Page 60: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
4–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 1 to 32OFF
Range: Off, On
Contact inputs summaryPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. INPUTS SUMMARY
The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs.
Output relays summaryPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.
NOTE
NOTE: Output Relays #1 and #2 are the Open and Close relays respectively.
Flexlogic summaryPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > FLEXLOGIC SUMMARYFLEXLOGIC STATUSFLEX LINES USED
RTDsPATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > RTDs
RTDs
NOTE
NOTE: This status display is available only if an optional IO_G card is used.
CI#1 OFF CI#7 OFF
CI#2 OFF CI#8 OFF
CI#3 OFF CI#9 OFF
CI#4 OFF CI#10 OFF
CI#5 OFF CI#11 OFF
CI#6 OFF CI#12 OFF
RLY#1 OFF RLY#5 OFF
RLY#2 OFF RLY#6 OFF
RLY#3 OFF RLY#7 OFF
RLY#4 OFF RLY#8 OFF
![Page 61: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–5
A2 Metering
Line currents and line voltages are filtered values used for the control algorithm. The integration is based on an IIR filter over the last 10 measurements. For abrupt changes in metering, higher than twice of the pickup value, a quick update over these registers are made. Displayed metered quantities are updated approximately three (3) times a second for readability. The DGC Switch Controller measures and computes the following electrical quantities:
Source Side AC inputs configuration Load Side AC inputs configuration
Voltage Inputs: 3Φ V Current Inputs: 3Φ I Voltage Inputs: 3Φ V
Wye VTs: Ph-n and ph-ph voltages (V)
Ph A, B, C currents (A)
Wye VTs: Ph-n and ph-ph voltages (V)Delta VTs: ph-ph voltages (V)
Delta VTs: ph-ph voltages (V)
Neutral current (A)
Frequency
Negative sequence voltage (V)
Negative sequence current (A)
Positive sequence voltage (V)
Positive sequence current (A)
Zero sequence voltage (V) Zero sequence current (A)
Voltage 2nd to 8th harmonic (%)
Current 2nd to 8th harmonic (%)
Voltage THD (%) Current THD (%)
3Φ Real power (kVA)
3Φ Reactive power (kVAr)
3Φ Apparent power (kVA)
Power factor (lag or lead)
3Φ Positive real energy (kWh)
3Φ Negative real energy (kWh)
3Φ Positive reactive energy (kVAr*h)
3Φ Negative reactive energy (kVAr*h)
![Page 62: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
4–6 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 2: Metering menu
By scrolling the Up/Down keys, the unit shows one-by-one, all metered values as follows:
A2 METERING
CURRENT
CURRENT SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE SOURCE
VOLTAGE LOAD
VOLTAGE SRC SEQ
POWER
FREQUENCY
THD
HARMONICS
ENERGY
▼
A2 CURRENT
PH A CURRENT
PH B CURRENT
PH C CURRENT
NTRL CURRENT
▼
A2 VOLTAGE SOURCE
PH A
PH B
PH C
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
▼
A2 POWER
3 ph ACTIVE POWER
POWER FACTOR
3 ph REACTIVE POWER
3 ph APPARENT POWER
▼
A2 FREQUENCY
Frequency
A2 THD
THD PH A CURRENT
THD PH B CURRENT
THD PH C CURRENT
THD PH A VOLTAGE
THD PH B VOLTAGE
THD PH C VOLTAGE
▼
A2 HARMONICS
2ND HARM PH A CRNT
2ND HARM PH B CRNT
2ND HARM PH C CRNT
2ND HARM PH A VOLT
2ND HARM PH B VOLT
2ND HARM PH C VOLT
...
8TH HARM PH A CRNT
8TH HARM PH B CRNT
8TH HARM PH C CRNT
8TH HARM PH A VOLT
8TH HARM PH B VOLT
8TH HARM PH C VOLT
▼
A2 VOLTAGE LOAD
PH A
PH B
PH C
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
▼
A2 CURRENT SEQUENCE
POS SEQ CURRENT
NEG SEQ CURRENT
ZERO SEQ CURRENT
▼
A2 VOLTAGE SRC SEQ
POS SEQ
NEG SEQ
ZERO SEQ
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
▼
A2 ENERGY
3 ph POS REAL ENERGY
3 ph NEG REAL ENERGY
3 ph POS REACT ENERGY
3 ph NEG REACT ENERGY
▼
![Page 63: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–7
CurrentPH A CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
PH B CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
PH C CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
NTRL CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
VoltagePH A VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
PH B VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
PH C VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
SequencesPOS. SEQ. CURRENT 0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
NEG. SEQ. CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
ZERO SEQ. CURRENT0.0 A 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 A, 0 to 359° lag
POS. SEQ. VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
NEG. SEQ. VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
ZERO SEQ. VOLTAGE0.0 V 0° lag
Range: 0.0 to 700000.0 V
![Page 64: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
4–8 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Power3-PH ACTIVE POWER0.0 kW
Range: -50000.0 to 50000.0 kW
3-PH REACTIVE POWER0.0 kVAR
Range: -50000.0 to 50000.0 kVAR
3-PH APPARENT POWER0.0 kVA
Range: -50000.0 to 50000.0 kVA
POWER FACTOR0.00
Range: -0.99 to 1.00
Energy3-PH POSITIVE REAL ENERGY0.0 kWh
Range: 0 to 999999.999 kWh
3-PH NEGATIVE REAL ENERGY0.0 kWh
Range: 0 to 999999.999 kWh
3-PH POSITIVE REACTIVE ENERGY0.0 kVAr*h
Range: 0 to 999999.999 kVAr*h
3-PH NEGATIVE REACTIVE ENERGY0.0 kVAr*h
Range: 0 to 999999.999 kVAr*h
FrequencyFREQUENCY0.00 Hz
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)THD CURRENTS
THD PH A CURRENT0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
THD PH B CURRENT0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
THD PH C CURRENT0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
THD VOLTAGES
![Page 65: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–9
THD PH A VOLTAGE0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
THD PH B VOLTAGE0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
THD PH C VOLTAGE0.0%
Range: 0.20% to 100%
HarmonicsCURRENTS
2nd HARM PH A CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
2nd HARM PH B CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
2nd HARM PH C CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%..
8th HARM PH A CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
8th HARM PH B CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
8th HARM PH C CRNT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
VOLTAGES
2nd HARM PH A VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
2nd HARM PH B VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
2nd HARM PH C VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%..
![Page 66: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
4–10 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
8th HARM PH A VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
8th HARM PH B VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
8th HARM PH C VOLT0.00%
Range: 0.20 to 100.00%
![Page 67: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–11
Default screensThe measurements and metered values can also be viewed by scrolling Up or Down through the default screens as shown below:
Power calculationThe DGCS is calculating real, reactive and apparent power (labeled P, Q and S respectively) using measured currents and voltages on the source side of the switch.When VTs are connected in Wye, the following formulae are used:
![Page 68: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
4–12 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
When VTs are connected in Open Delta, the following formulae are used:
![Page 69: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–13
A3 Records
Figure 3: Records menu
Event recordsEvent Records include events generated by operation of the following functions:
• Control functions
• Open and Close commands
• Alarms, Blocks
• Change of inputs.
The events are stored in memory, which can store up to 256 events. Each event is stored with an event number, date, time, and analog data of interest. The following list shows the analog data viewable for each recorded event
CauseTimeDatePhase A CurrentPhase B CurrentPhase C CurrentNeutral CurrentVan Voltage Source (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vbn Voltage Source (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vcn Voltage Source (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vab Voltage Source (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Vbc Voltage Source (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Vca Voltage Source (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Van Voltage Load (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vbn Voltage Load (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vcn Voltage Load (Wye,Va,Vb,Vc VT input)*Vab Voltage Load (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Vbc Voltage Load (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Vca Voltage Load (Delta,Vab,Vbc,Vca VT input)*Voltage Unbalance
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
A3 RECORDS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
891970.cdr
A3 RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
DATA LOGGER
CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR DATA LOGGER
▼
A3 DATA LOGGER
TOTAL TRIGGERS
TRIGGER CAUSE
DATA LOG STATUS
▼
A3 EVENT REC T421
E421,
“
Date
Event Record”
Time
...
A3 CLEAR DATA LOGGERCLEAR
A3 CLEAR EVENT RECCLEAR
![Page 70: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
4–14 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Power Factor3Ph Real Power3Ph Reactive Power3Ph Apparent PowerFrequencyTHD Current Phase ATHD Current Phase BTHD Current Phase CTHD Voltage Phase ATHD Voltage Phase BTHD Voltage Phase C
*Dependent on VT Input selection.
Data loggerThe data logger is used to sample and record actual values at a selectable time interval. The stored actual values are chosen according to the user’s criteria. For a list of available settings, refer to Chapter 5: Settings / S1 Product Setup / Data Logger.
![Page 71: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–15
![Page 72: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
4–16 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A4 MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A4 Messages
Target MessagesTarget messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as pickups, trips, or alarms.The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated. The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE DOWN key. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show the target messages unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES, where they can be reviewed. If the target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different from “RESET”, they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the SETPOINTS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting, that will start timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. The following shows the format of a typical Target Message:
Figure 4: Typical target message
Example of a Phase IOC1 operation - phase A:Phase IOC1 function: Trip
Cause <Function>
The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated element), and the element function.
State: Operate
This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup, Operated, Alarm.
Phase: A
The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated.
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Cause <function>
State: Operate
Phase:▼
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
State: Operate
Phase:A▼
![Page 73: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 MESSAGES
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–17
Self-Test ErrorsThe relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. Minor problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the power system. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
CAUTION: Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay will:
• Display the error on the relay display.
• Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
• De-energize auxiliary relays programmed for “Failsafe” operation.
• Inhibit operation of all other output relays.
• Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED.
• Flash the "ALARM" LED.
• Display the cause of major self-test failure.
• Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Figure 5: Typical Self-test warning
Flash MessagesFlash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response to pressing certain keys. The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds.
Figure 6: Typical Flash message
SETPOINT STORED
This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint message (see example above). The edited value was stored as entered.
COMMAND EXECUTED
This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON, OFF, YES, NO, etc.
INVALID PASSWORD
This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password, as part of password security.
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact Factory:
Error code:1
![Page 74: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
4–18 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A4 MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
AR IN PROGRESS
This flash message appears when the Autoreclosure is in progress performing the configured sequence.
![Page 75: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 5: Settings
Settings
Figure 1: Main Settings menu
S1 Product Setup
The main Product Setup menu is shown below:
SET IN S
S1 PRODUCT SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
S3 CONFIGURATION
S4 CONTROLS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
▼
89180 .cdr
![Page 76: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
5–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S1 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 2: Product setup menu
S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
S1 CLOCK SETUP
DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
▼
TIME (HH:MM:SS)
DLS ENABLE
DLS START MONTH
DLS START WEEK
DLS START WEEKDAY
DLS END MONTH
DLS END WEEK
DLS END WEEKDAY
S1 PRODUCT SETUP
CLOCK SETUP
PASSWORD SECURITY
COMMUNICATIONS
EVENT RECORDER
DATA LOGGER
FRONT PANEL
INSTALLATION
▼
891964.cdr
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
MODBUS
DNP
S1 EVENT RECORDER
PICKUP EVENTS
TRIP EVENTS
ALARM EVENTS
CONTROL EVENTS
DROPOUT EVENTS
CONTACT INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
SETTING DATE/TIME
▼
S1 FRONT PANEL
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
SCREEN SAVER
LED OPEN COLOR
LED CLSD COLOR
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
▼
S1 INSTALLATION
PRODUCT NAME
PRODUCT STATUS
▼
S1 DATA LOGGER
CONTINUOUS MODE
POSITION TRIGGER
SAMPLE RATE
DATA LOG TRGR SRC
CHANNEL 1
...
CHANNEL 10
▼
S1 RS485
RS485 BAUD RATE
PARITY
REAR RS485 PORT
COMM FAIL ALARM
▼
S1 MODBUS
MODBUS SLAVE ADR
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP POINTS LIST
S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP ADDRESS
TIME SYNC IN PER
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE
▼
S1 DNP POINTS LIST
BINARY INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
S1 DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP OBJECT 1
DNP OBJECT 2
DNP OBJECT 20
DNP OBJECT 21
DNP OBJECT 22
DNP OBJECT 23
DNP OBJECT 30
DNP OBJECT 32
▼
S1 BINARY INPUTS
POINT 0
...
POINT 63
▼
S1 BINARY OUTPUTS
POINT 0 ON
POINT 0 OFF
...
POINT 15 ON
POINT 15 OFF
▼
S1 BINARY OUTPUTS
POINT 0 ENTRY
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
POINT 0 DEADBAND
...
POINT 31 ENTRY
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
POINT 31 DEADBAND
▼
![Page 77: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S1 PRODUCT SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–3
ClockThe DGCS has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping for various features such as the event and transient recorders. Time synchronization priority uses Modbus or DNP commands as follows:Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function, and as such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required.There is no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. A synchronization command issued from DNP for example, can be directly followed by another from MODBUS, for example.PATH: SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > CLOCK
DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY)
Range: Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year: 2009 to 2099Default: Jan 15 2009
This setting sets the date in the specified format.
TIME: (HH:MM:SS)
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59Default: 03:15:50
This setting sets the time in the specified format.
DLS ENABLE
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
With DLS Enabled, the main CPU has to maintain the information regarding AV.m_DaylightSavingsActive, because it is necessary in the communications CPU to translate from local time to UTC in 61850 protocol. In addition, if SNTP is enabled, the main CPU will receive UTC time from the communications CPU and it needs to apply this in order to pass it to local time.
Without any other synchronization, DLS correction is applied only at 0200 hours on daylight saving months.
PATH: SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED]
DLS START MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, DecemberDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, LastDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, SunDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time.
DLS END MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, DecemberDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time.
![Page 78: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
5–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S1 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
DLS END WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, LastDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, SunDefault: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time.
Password securityPassword security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against unauthorized setting changes and control. The relay has programmable passwords for both Local and Remote access, which can be used to allow settings changes and command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. These passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. The Local and the Remote passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP). The Master Reset Password (MRP) is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When the MRP is programmed to “NULL” all password security is disabled.. The remote user may choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords.Each interface (RS485, USB, and front panel keypad) is independent of one another, meaning that enabling settings access on one interface does not enable access for any of the other interfaces (i.e., the password must be explicitly entered via the interface from which access is desired).The EnerVista DGCS Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay’s passwords as well as enabling/disabling settings access. For example, when an attempt is made to modify a settings but access is restricted, the program will prompt the user to enter the password and send it to the relay before the settings can actually be written to the relay. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming, it is up to the programmer to incorporate appropriate security for the application.Aside from being logged out of security, which allows the user to read settings and actual values only, three levels of security access are provided: settings Level, Control Level, and Master Level. The settings and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local passwords (USB port and keypad), or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 port). The user can have either settings or Control Level active, but not both simultaneously from the same interface. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting of passwords, and includes all settings and Control Level access rights. The Master Level cannot be attained from the keypad. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10 characters in length, and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. The Master Level can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having to enter the Master Level. The Master Reset Password is encrypted, and is not viewable from the keypad. If the Master Reset Password is lost, the user should contact the factory to decrypt the Master Reset Password.After password entry, the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity has elapsed, after which the password must be re-entered. A power-loss or entering in the wrong password will log the user out of security.Further definition of the access levels is described as follows:SETTINGS LEVEL
• Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu
• Changing settings under the SETTINGS menu except the features requiring control access listed below
![Page 79: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S1 PRODUCT SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–5
• Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and breaker maintenance settings, except the features requiring control access listed below
• Changing the Local or Remote settings Password, depending on the interface being accessed
CONTROL LEVEL
• Reset command
• Open and Close Breaker commands
• Virtual Input commands
• Clearing of event records, transient records, and other data
• Uploading new firmware
• Changing the Local or Remote Control Password, depending on the interface being accessed
MASTER LEVEL
• Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password
• Disabling password security
• All settings and Control Level access rights
For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista DGCS Setup software, refer to Chapter 3.
CommunicationsFigure 3: Main Communications menu
S1 RS485
RS485 BAUD RATE
PARITY
REAR 485 PORT
COMM FAIL ALARM
▼
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
MODBUS
DNP
891846.cdr
S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE ADR
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP POINTS LIST
S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP ADDRESS
TIME SYNC IIN PER
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE
▼
S1 DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP OBJECT 1
▼
DNP OBJECT 2
DNP OBJECT 20
DNP OBJECT 21
DNP OBJECT 22
DNP OBJECT 23
DNP OBJECT 30
DNP OBJECT 32
S1 DNP POINTS LIST
BINARY INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
S1 BINARY INPUTS
POINT 0
...
POINT 63
▼
S1 BINARY OUTPUTS
POINT 0 ON:
POINT 0 OFF:
...
POINT 15 ON:
POINT 15 OFF:
▼
S1 ANALOG INPUTS
POINT 0 ENTRY
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
POINT 0 DEADBAND
...
POINT 31 ENTRY
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
▼
POINT 31 DEADBAND
![Page 80: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
5–6 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S1 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RS485 interface The DGCS is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. The RS485 port has settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista DGCS Setup software. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the device firmware. A maximum of 32 -series devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 port.Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the program, or the SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on the display, to configure the serial port.
Figure 4: Serial port configuration settings
The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port.
BAUD RATE
Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200Default: 115200
This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None
This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.
Modbus The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the DGCS. Modbus is available via the RS485 serial link (Modbus RTU). The DGCS always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master device. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands. Refer to the DGCS Communications Guide for additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map.The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. The server is capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in the device. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.The DGCS operates as a Modbus slave device onlySelect the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in software, or the SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below.
Figure 5: Modbus protocol configuration settings
The following Modbus settings are available:
![Page 81: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S1 PRODUCT SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–7
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1Default: 254
This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Each device must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Please refer to the DGCS Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus communications protocol.
DNP communication The menu structure for the DNP (distributed network protocol) is shown below.PATH: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP
Figure 6: DNP communication settings menu
Please refer to the DGCS Communications Guide for more details on communications.
Event recorderThe Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 50 events. All events are stored in non-volatile memory on power-down, where the information is maintained for up to 3 days in case of lost DGCS control power.
NOTE
NOTE: The relay requires a minimum time of 15 seconds from power-on in order to be able to save the 50 events on power-down. If power is lost before the first 15 seconds have elapsed, the controller will not be able to save the events.
PATH: SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > EVENT RECORDER
S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP ADDRESS
TME SYNC IIN PER.
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE
▼
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP POINTS LIST
891743.cdr
POINT 0
...
POINT 1
POINT 2
POINT 63
▼
S1 DNP POINTS LIST
BINARY INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUTS
POINT 0 ENTRY
...
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
POINT 0 DEADBAND
POINT 31 ENTRY
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
POINT 31 DEADBAND
▼
POINT 0 ON
...
POINT 0 OFF
POINT 1 ON
POINT 1 OFF
POINT 15 ON
POINT 15 OFF
▼
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP OBJECT 1
DNP OBJECT 2
DNP OBJECT 20
DNP OBJECT 21
DNP OBJECT 22
DNP OBJECT 23
DNP OBJECT 30
DNP OBJECT 32
![Page 82: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
5–8 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S1 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PICKUP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events that occur when a monitoring element picks up.
DROPOUT EVENTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a monitoring element.
TRIP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records trip events.
ALARM EVENTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM” function.
CONTROL EVENTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
If set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the programmed control elements.
CONTACT INPUTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder will record the event when a contact input changes its state.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events which occur upon state changes of any virtual input.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: EnabledWhen set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events which occur upon state changes of any virtual outputs.
SETTING DATE/TIME
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events which occur upon changes to Date/Time.
DataloggerThe following settings are available:
![Page 83: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S1 PRODUCT SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–9
SAMPLE RATE
Range: 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, DisableDefault: 1 min
Determines how often data is stored in the data log.
CONTINUOUS MODE
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
Determines whether or not the trigger data is overwritten with new data. Enabled will overwrite the previous trigger data with new trigger data. When Disabled, the data log will run until filled with 256 samples. Continuous Mode should be used when the data is stored externally by a polling system. The sample rate should be chosen to match the poll rate of the external program.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% steps of 1%Default: 25%
Percentage of the sample buffer used for pretrigger samples.
DATA LOG TRGR SRC
Range: Command, VO1 to VO32, Any Trip Pickup, Any Trip, Any Trip Dropout, Any Alarm Pickup, Any Alarm, Any Alarm DropoutDefault: Command
Selects a trigger source. Command is always active. Logic Elements can be used to create combinations of trigger sources.
CHANNEL 1
Disabled, Ph A Current, Ph B Current, Ph C Current, System Frequency, Power Factor, 3ph Real Power, 3ph Reactive Power, 3ph Apperent Power, External Temp, THD Curr PhA, THD Curr PhB, THD Curr PhC, 2nd….8th Harm Curr PhA, 2nd….8th Harm Curr PhB, 2nd….8th Harm Curr PhC, THD Volt PhA, THD Volt PhB, THD Volt PhC, THD Volt PhA, THD Volt PhB, THD Volt PhC, 2nd….8th Harm Volt PhA, 2nd….8th Harm Volt PhB, 2nd….8th Harm Volt PhC, THD Line Volt, THD Line Curr, 2nd….8th Harm Curr, 2nd….8th Harm Volt, (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca - Source and Load), Positive Seq Curr, Negative Seq Curr, Zero Seq Curr, Positive Seq Volt, Negative Seq Volt, Zero Seq Volt , Open Count, Close Count, AS Trip Cnt, KI2t Cnt PhaseA, KI2t Cnt PhaseB, KI2t Cnt PhaseC
NOTE
NOTE: Refer to DGCS Communications guide for the complete list of analog variables available for data logger channel selection.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
NOTE: Sources and Defaults for Channels 2 to 10 are the same as those for Channel 1.
Front panelThe user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by sending text through Modbus.PATH: SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > FRONT PANEL
![Page 84: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
5–10 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S1 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 sDefault: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Range: 1 s to 65535 sDefault: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 minDefault: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the DGCS automatically shuts off the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen messages.
LED OPEN COLOR
Range: Red, Green, OrangeDefault: Red
This setting defines the color of the LED “SWITCH OPEN”.
LED CLOSE COLOR
Range: Red, Green, OrangeDefault: Green
This setting defines the color of the LED “SWITCH CLOSED”.
InstallationPATH: SETTINGS > S1 PRODUCT SETUP > INSTALLATION
PRODUCT NAME
Range: Name, Alpha-numeric (20 characters)Default: DA Name
The PRODUCT NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a DGCS unit. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel.
PRODUCT STATUS
Range: Not Ready, ReadyDefault: Not Ready
Allows the user to activate/deactivate the DGCS. The DGCS is not operational when set to "Not Ready."
![Page 85: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–11
S2 System setup
One three-phase current input and two three-phase voltage inputs are available on the DGCS for connection to the external measuring transformers. These are programmable through the Current and Voltage Sensing menus. During normal loading conditions the three-phase currents and voltages are well balanced. The controller uses currents and voltages measured on the source side of the switch to compute the electrical power (apparent, active, and reactive). The table in the main ACTUAL VALUES/A2 METERING section shows all electrical quantities measured and calculated by the controller. The DGCS displays the electrical quantities shown in the ACTUAL VALUES/A2 METERING subsections, for the Source and Load sides separately.
![Page 86: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
5–12 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 7: System setup menu
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
SOURCE SIDE VTs
LOAD SIDE VTs
VT CORRECTIONS
POWER SYSTEM
OPEN/CLOSE SETUP
CIRC BRK SETUP
BATTERY BACKUP
▼
891865.cdr
S2 OPEN/CLOSE SETUP
SW TYPE
RATED CURRENT
RATED VOLTAGE
52a CONTACT
52b CONTACT
▼
S2 CURRENT SENSING
CT PRIMARY
CT SECONDARY
SENSOR TYPE
CONDUCTOR DIAMETER
SENSOR GAIN
SENSOR OFFSET
SENSOR PHASE SHIFT
NOM SECONDARY V
▼
S2 SOURCE SIDE VTs
SOURCE VT INPUTS
SOURCE VT RATIO
SRC VT SECONDARY
▼
S2 POWER SYSTEM
SYSTEM ROTATION
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
▼
S2 BATTERY BACKUP
BATT TEST CYC TIME
BATT TEST DURATION
BATT TEST LIMIT
▼
S2 LOAD SIDE VTs
LOAD VT INPUTS
LOAD VT RATIO
LOAD VT SECONDARY
▼
S2 CIRC BRK SETUP
CB STATE INFO
CB TYPE
CB (3 pole) CLOSED
CB a CLOSED
CB b CLOSED
CB c CLOSED
▼
S2 VT CORRECTIONS
SRC VOLTAGES
LOAD VOLTAGES
S2 SRC VOLTAGES
VT1 MAGNITUDE
VT1 PHASE SHIFT
VT2 MAGNITUDE
VT2 PHASE SHIFT
VT3 MAGNITUDE
VT3 PHASE SHIFT
▼
S2 LOAD VOLTAGES
VT1 MAGNITUDE
VT1 PHASE SHIFT
VT2 MAGNITUDE
VT2 PHASE SHIFT
VT3 MAGNITUDE
VT3 PHASE SHIFT
▼
![Page 87: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–13
Current sensingPATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > S2 CURRENT SENSING
SENSOR TYPE*
Range: User Sensor, Lindsey Sensor, Fisher Pierce 1301, LSC-XXX-122Default: User Sensor
This setting defines the type of current sensor connected to the DGC. The DGC provides ways to connect different types of sensors by applying suitable correction factors.
These kinds of current sensors translate the primary current flowing across the distribution line into an induced voltage of few volts. The voltage induced in the coil of the sensor is directly proportional to the alternating current in the primary conductor.
CONDUCTOR DIAMETER*
Range: 0.5 to 1.25 inches in steps of 0.25 inchesDefault: 0.53 inches
NOTE
NOTE: “CONDUCTOR DIAMETER” is not available with “sensor type” programmed to “Lindsey Sensor”.
This setting is used to include the outside diameter of the distributed line conductor in inches. This setting is needed due to the relationship between the primary current of the line and the output voltage of the current sensor is directly proportional to the diameter of the conductor of the line.
See, Sensor Gain (below) for more information.
For “Sensor Type” selected to “Fisher Pierce 1301” or “LSC-XXX-122”, the gain, offset and phase shift parameters have been internally hardcoded. Only the conductor diameter setting is required to be changed by the user.
SENSOR GAIN*
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01Default: 17.52
NOTE
NOTE: “SENSOR GAIN” is available when “sensor type” is programmed to “User Sensor” OR “Lindsey Sensor”.
This setting provides the magnitude correction factor between the primary current and secondary output voltage of the sensor.
In current sensors, the relationship between the current and voltage is usually in the form:
Ip = K . Esi
Where:
Ip - Primary Current in amperes
K - Conductor Diameter formula
Esi - Secondary Output Voltage
For Lindsey sensors: The K parameter is the value programmed under the ‘SENSOR GAIN’ setpoint. The ratio between the primary current in amperes and the secondary value in volts is included under this setting.
For User sensors: The K value is parameterized in the form:
K = (Diameter x Gain) + Offset
Diameter – Primary conductor outside diameter in inches.
Gain – Factor between the primary current and secondary voltage. This value is programmed into the SENSOR GAIN setting
Offset – This value is programmed into the SENSOR OFFSET Setting.
![Page 88: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
5–14 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SENSOR OFFSET*
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01Default: 77.81
NOTE
NOTE: “SENSOR OFFSET” is available only when “sensor type” is programmed to “User Sensor”.
This setting provides the offset between the primary current and induced voltage in the sensor. Usually, sensor manufacturers provide calibration factor curves in the form:
Primary_Current = K x Secondary_Current
Where:
K = (Diameter x Gain) + Offset
See SENSOR GAIN setting for more information on this setting.
SENSOR PHASE SHIFT*
Range: 0 to 360 in steps of 1Default: 0
NOTE
NOTE: “SENSOR PHASE SHIFT” is available only when “sensor type” is programmed to “User Sensor”.
This setting provides the lagging phase shift between the output voltage of the sensor and the primary current of the line.
NOMINAL SECONDARY V*
Range: 1.0 to 30.0 V in steps of 0.1 VDefault: 10.0 V
This setting provides the nominal current of the distribution line in the secondary voltage value. This value is used as a unit reference for the detection functions.For example: A Lindsey Sensor of 600 A / 10V located in a distributed line with a primary nominal current of 450 A.The secondary voltage at this nominal current will be: V nominal = 10 * 450 A / 600 A = 7.5 VThis value has to be programmed under this setting.
PHASE CT PRIMARY**
Range: 1 to 6000 A in steps of 1 ADefault: 1 A
This setting defines the rated primary current of the connected current transformer.
PHASE CT SECONDARY**
Range: 1 A, 5 ADefault: 5 A
This setting defines the rated secondary current of the connected current transformer.
* The group of settings: “SENSOR TYPE,” “CONDUCTOR DIAMETER,” “SENSOR GAIN,” “SENSOR OFFSET,” “SENSOR PHASE SHIFT,” and “NOMINAL SECONDARY V” is available only if the IO_J Order Code was chosen for slot C.** The group of settings: “PHASE CT PRIMARY,” and “PHASE CT SECONDARY” is available only if the IO_A Order Code was chosen for slot C.
Voltage sensingPATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > S2 SOURCE SIDE VTs
SOURCE VT INPUTS
Range: Wye, DeltaDefault: Wye
This setting defines the type of VT connection wired to the source side terminals of the controller (labeled ‘D’).
![Page 89: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–15
SOURCE VT RATIO
Range: 1:1 to 1:10000 in steps of 1Default: 1:1
This setting specifies the voltage sensing ratio between the primary and the secondary voltage transformer sides. It applies to the source side VT terminals of the controller (labeled ‘D’).
SRC VT SECONDARY
Range (IO_B card): 60.0 to 440.0 V in steps of 0.1 VDefault: 120.0 VRange (IO_J card): 0.5 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1 VDefault: 10.0 V
This setting specifies the nominal voltage of the secondary of the voltage transformer connected to the source side VT terminals of the controller (labeled ‘D’).
PATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > S2 LOAD SIDE VTs
LOAD VT INPUTS
Range: Wye, DeltaDefault: Wye
This setting defines the type of VT connection wired to the source side terminals of the controller (labeled ‘E’).
LOAD VT RATIO
Range: 1:1 to 1:10000 in steps of 1Default: 1:1
This setting specifies the voltage sensing ratio between the primary and the secondary voltage transformer sides. It applies to the source side VT terminals of the controller (labeled ‘E’).
LOAD VT SECONDARY
Range (IO-B card): 60.0 to 440.0 V in steps of 0.1 VDefault: 120.0 VRange (IO-J card): 0.5 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1 VDefault: 10.0 V
This setting specifies the nominal voltage of the secondary of the voltage transformer connected to the source side VT terminals of the controller (labeled ‘E’).
VT CORRECTIONSPATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > S2 VT CORRECTIONS > S2 SRC VOLTAGES
VT1/2/3 MAGNITUDE
Range: 0.500 to 1.500 in steps of 0.001Default: 1.000
The DGC uses magnitude and phase correction factors to correct for manufacturing tolerances in the line-sensing equipment.This setting specifies the correction magnitude that must be applied for the measurement taken from VT1/2/3 input. The magnitude correction factor equals:Calculated VT1/2/3 Voltage = VT1/2/3 Magnitude x Measured VT1/2/3 Voltage
VT1/2/3 PHASE SHIFT
Range: 0.0 to 359.9 in steps of 0.1º Default: 0.0º Lag
This setting provides the leading phase shift correction that should be applied to the phasor calculations to compensate the angle error provided by the VT sensor.These settings shall be shown for models provided with VTs sensor in the Load side. Models with IO_J card in the slot E.
![Page 90: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
5–16 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > S2 VT CORRECTIONS > S2 LOAD VOLTAGES
VT1/2/3 MAGNITUDE
Range: 0.500 to 1.500 in steps of 0.001 Default: 1.000
The DGC uses magnitude and phase correction factors to correct for manufacturing tolerances in the line-sensing equipment.This setting specifies the correction magnitude that must be applied for the measurement taken from VT1/2/3 input. The magnitude correction factor equals:Calculated VT1/2/3 Voltage = VT1/2/3 Magnitude x Measured VT1/2/3 Voltage
VT1/2/3 PHASE SHIFT
Range: 0.0 to 359.9 in steps of 0.1º Default: 0.0º Lag
This setting provides the leading phase shift correction that should be applied to the phasor calculations to compensate the angle error provided by the VT sensor.
Power systemPATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 50 Hz, 60 HzDefault: 60 Hz
This setting defines the frequency of the power system.
SYSTEM ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACBDefault: ABC
This setting defines the phase rotation of the power system.
Open/Close SetupThe Switch Control feature has a programmable menu where the user can set the criteria for open and close commands to the installed load or no load break switch. DGCS has one dedicated output relay for the “Open” command and another one for the “Close” command. Depending on ordered controller, the DGCS may have a number of other auxiliary output relays that can be programmed to close/open logic as well. The logic diagrams below show how the open and close commands are individually generated.Switch control outputs will energize when the respective close/open request is generated, unless any blocking condition exists. De-energizing of the outputs is controlled by the state of the switch as monitored by its 52a and/or 52b contact and delayed by a settable period of time. Details are shown in the table below, “Switch Auxiliary Contacts and Switch Operation”.
![Page 91: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–17
Table 1: Switch Auxiliary Contacts and Switch Operation
If the controller fails to detect the switch operational state, an alarm will be generated. Details about the alarm function are shown in the table below, “Switch monitoring logic with both 52a and 52b contacts configured”.
Table 2: Switch Monitoring logic with both 52a and 52b contacts configured
The duration of the output energized state depends on different conditions but it is limited to the adjustable time. More details are available in the Switch Control logic diagram below.MODES OF OPERATIONRemote/Local ModeThe REMOTE/LOCAL pushbutton toggles between REMOTE and LOCAL mode of operation. Each of the two modes is associated with a LED to show the selection. This selection has absolute priority and it can be made only by operating the REMOTE/LOCAL pushbutton.Automatic, Manual, or OFF ModeThe AUTO/OFF/MANUAL pushbutton toggles between either AUTO, OFF, or MANUAL mode of operation. The Auto and Manual modes are associated with a corresponding LED, which turns on upon mode selection. When OFF position is selected, both LEDs are off.The controller mode can be selected from the faceplate pushbuttons or from the remote location. SCADA user has a read only access at all times, regardless of the mode selected. However, issuing commands and selecting AUTO/OFF/MANUAL modes via SCADA is restricted and it depends on the selection as shown in the “Controller Modes” table below.
52a Contact Configured
52b Contact Configured
Switch Operation
Yes Yes The Open output relay remains operating until both the 52a and the 52b switch contacts read open and close respectively. These aux. contacts state define opened switch. The Close output relay remains operating until both the 52a, and the 52b contacts read close and open respectively. These aux. contacts state define closed switch.
Yes No The Open output relay remains operating until 52a contact changes its state from closed to open. This indicates open switch. The Close output relay remains operating until 52a contact changes its state from open to close. This indicates closed switch.
No Yes The Open output relay remains operating until 52b contact changes its state from open to closed. This indicates open switch. The Close output relay remains operating until 52b contact changes its state from closed to open. This indicates closed switch.
No No The Switch state is not monitored.
Auxiliary Contact 52a Auxiliary Contact 52b Switch Position Alarm
On Off CLOSED No
Off On OPEN No
Off Off Switch State Failed After Time Delay until acknowledged
On On
![Page 92: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
5–18 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 3: Controller Modes
In Manual mode, the DGCS controls the switch by responding to manually performed commands from the faceplate pushbuttons OPEN and CLOSE. In Automatic mode, the decision to send a Switch Open command will made by Control elements, if it is enabled.In both modes the DGC-S controller sends either Open or Close command to the switch using two digital outputs: RLY 1 SW OPEN and RLY 2 SW CLOSE.With Remote mode selected when in AUTO mode, the switch can be also controlled by either the OPEN/CLOSE commands sent via communications, or via asserting inputs configured in the Remote Inputs menu: REMOTE OPEN CMND and REMOTE CLOSE CMND. The remote control overrides the automatic control. After the remote regulation is performed, the controller will revert back to automatic mode.Block Auto mode from Communications (COMM BLOCK AUTO)The Auto mode can be blocked remotely by asserting the command COMM BLOCK AUTO via communications. This can be done only by using the EnerVista DGCS Setup program while in Remote control. In this case the switch can be controlled only remotely. This command is not visible on the HMI.Save Block Auto from Communications (SAVE COMM BLK AUTO)While in Remote mode, the user can select to keep the Auto mode blocked during loss of communication or loss of power to the DGCS, by setting the command SAVE COMM BLK AUTO, to “Enabled”. This will keep the Auto mode blocked after the communication or the power to the DGCS has been restored.Unblock Auto mode from Communications (COMM UNBLOCK AUTO)Both the COMM BLOCK AUTO and the SAVE COMM BLK AUTO selections will reset upon issuing COMM UNBLOCK AUTO command. This command is not visible on the HMI.The Switch setup settings for DGCS are as follows:PATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SW SETUP
SWITCH TYPE
Range: Load, No LoadDefault: Load
This setting selects the type of switch. If the switch is designed to interrupt the load current, the selection should be ‘Load’. If the switch is designed to open only when there is no load, the selection should be ‘No Load’.
When the switch type has been designated as Load, the switch rated current and switch voltage level is used to block the opening and closing commands. See SW RATED CURRENT and SW RATED VOLTAGE for more information.
Pushbutton Auto Manual
Remote Control Enabled - Automatic Operation enabled- SCADA read only enabled- SCADA Remote Open/ Close control override enabled- Remote Inputs Open/Close switch control override enabled- Manual Open/Close switch control disabled
- Automatic Operation disabled - SCADA read only enabled- SCADA Remote Open/Close switch control disabled- Remote Inputs Open/Close switch control disabled- Manual Open/Close switch control enabled
Local Control Enabled - Automatic Operation enabled- SCADA read only enabled- SCADA Remote Open/ Close switch control disabled- Remote Inputs Open/Close switch control disabled- Manual Open/Close switch control disabled
- Automatic Operation disabled- SCADA read only enabled- SCADA Remote Open/Close switch control disabled- Remote Inputs Open/Close switch control disabled- Manual Open/Close switch control enabled
![Page 93: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–19
NOTE
NOTE: SW RATED CURRENT and SW RATED VOLTAGE Setting will not be used when Switch type is selected as ‘No Load’.
SW RATED CURRENT
Range: 0.00 to 5000.00 ADefault: 600.00 A
This setting defines the switch rated current. Select the rated current level above which the opening command to the switch will be blocked.
SW RATED VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 50.00 kVDefault: 15.00 Kv
This setting defines the switch rated voltage. Select the rated voltage level above which the closing or the opening command to the switch will be blocked.
52a CONTACT
Range: Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled
Select ‘Enable’ if Contact Input 1 (terminal F5) is connected to the switch state Aux contact (52a). The contact is ON (energized) when the switch is closed and it is OFF (de-energized) when the switch is opened.
52b CONTACT
Range: Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled
Select ‘Enable’ if Contact Input 2 (terminal F6) is connected to the switch reversed state Aux contact (52b). The contact is ON (energized) when the switch is opened and it is OFF (de-energized) when the switch is closed.
Circuit breaker setupPATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CIRC BRK SETUP
CB STATE INFO
Range: Local, RemoteDefault: Local
This setting selects the means of getting the information about the circuit breaker state (opened or closed).
Local: Comparing currents and voltages with the minimum threshold.
Remote: Reading selected Contact Input (1 to x), Virtual Input (1 to 32), or Virtual Output (1 to 32). In addition, currents and voltages are compared with the minimum threshold to decide about the state of the circuit breaker.
CB TYPE
Range: 1 Unit (3 Pole), 3 Units (1 Pole)Default: 1 Unit (3 Pole)
This setting has to match the type of the circuit breaker installed on the source side of the feeder.
CB (3 POLE) CLOSED
Range: Off, Contact Inputs 1 to x, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting configures the input to receive the state of the main breaker. The breaker will be in the closed state when this input is activated.
![Page 94: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
5–20 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CB a CLOSED
Range: Off, Contact Inputs 1 to x, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting selects the input to receive the state of the pole of the phase a of the main breaker. The pole will be in the closed state when this input is activated.
CB b CLOSED
Range: Off, Contact Inputs 1 to x, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting selects the input to receive the state of the pole of the phase b of the main breaker. The pole will be in the closed state when this input is activated.
CB c CLOSED
Range: Off, Contact Inputs 1 to x, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting selects the input to receive the state of the pole of the phase c of the main breaker. The pole will be in the closed state when this input is activated.
Battery backupThe DGCS is capable of controlling the feeder switch in different conditions including power loss. The power loss can occur if the feeder circuit breaker opens up or there is a distribution grid blackout. During all power loss conditions, the DGCS is supplied from a backup battery. It is sized to keep the DGCS running for 8 hours. During normal running conditions, the battery is connected to the charger. Switching to different modes of operation is controlled by a standard IO-E module. This module is inserted in the second slot of the two DGCS racks, reserved for IO-E modules. The hardware described above is referred to as DGCS Battery Backup System (BBS).The battery is a Sealed Valve Regulated Lead Acid (SVRLA) battery. A slow “3 step charging cycle” is recommended for optimal charging of SVRLA batteries. Improper charging is among the most common problems of premature failure of Lead Acid batteries. The preferred three step charging procedure is common for SVRLA batteries and consists of a constant current step followed by two steps of constant voltage. In the first step, BULK step, a constant current is applied to the battery until the battery voltage reaches a level of 80% State of Charge (SOC). The next step of charging is referred to as the TOP OFF or ABSORPTION step, and holds the 80% SOC voltage constant until the battery is not accepting any more charge (or until a pre-set timer in the controller has expired). At this point, the voltage is dropped to a new level and held constant in what is called the FLOAT step, so that the battery remains fully charged. This profile is optimal for most lead acid batteries. For 24 V battery systems, the voltage (at 25°C) should be within the range of 28.4 to 30 V.The battery backup is not like a traditional standard battery and charger. The system implemented is in fact simpler as it splits the charger into two parts: a power supply and a charger controller. The main reason a traditional method cannot be implemented is because no off the shelf charger exists that meets the wide temperature range of –40° to 60° and can withstand GE type test requirements.It is also important to capture the minimum and maximum voltages that the load can withstand. The minimum turn ON voltage for the load Switch Controller is 20VDC. The battery should therefore supply power down to 20VDC and then cut the load off to prevent deep discharge.A Battery Management System (BMS) board is implemented to the BBS to optimize battery life and provide useful feedback to the DGC. The BMS board will output the following to the DGC:
![Page 95: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–21
1. Battery Low warning (19.6 V)
2. Battery fuse blown.Main functionThe connections of the BBS components are shown in the BBS wiring diagram shown below. Under normal running conditions, the main power supply feeds the DGCS and the battery charger. When a power loss condition occurs, the battery supplies power to the DGCS. Occasionally, the system checks the battery condition. MODES OF OPERATIONRunIn normal running condition, the power is fed from the unit labeled ‘POWER SUPPLY’, contact output 1 is closed, and contact output 2 is open. So, the battery is connected to the charger (unit labeled ‘CHARGER’) and its capacity is constantly being maintained at optimum level. In addition, the DGCS CPU power input is constantly energized.BackupThe BBS switches to this mode, when the power is down. In Backup mode, terminals labeled ‘BATTERY’ connect to terminals ‘DC LOAD’ inside the charger (unit labeled ‘ROGUE’) allowing the battery to feed the DGCS. Contact output 1 is closed, and contact output 2 is open.TestBattery testIn test mode, the battery is disconnected from the charger and connected to a 5 ohm resistor for a certain time period that can be programmed in the BBS menu. During the test, Contact output 1 is open and Contact output 2 is closed. The duration of the test can be programmed. If the voltage stays above the contact input threshold (19.4 V) during the test, the battery will be considered healthy. Otherwise, the test aborts and an alarm flag is be set.The sequence is initiated periodically. The time between two tests can be set. In addition, pushing the button labeled ‘BATTERY TEST’ on the front panel, initiates the testing sequence.
NOTE
NOTE: If a power loss occurs during battery test, the DGCS power is supplied from the battery through the diode D3. In addition, after the power loss (detected by low “AC power OK” input), the battery test will abort within the output relay operate time.Fuse testThe Battery fuse test is performed simultaneously with the battery test by checking the state of Contact inputs 1 and 2. If both are detected high, the fuse is considered healthy. If Contact input 2 is high but Contact input 1 is low, the fuse blown alarm will be set.Battery alarm LEDThis is a red LED located on the front panel. The LED light is off during normal operation. The LED turns on in three cases as follows.
• The battery test fails for a programmable number of times. Test failures have to be consecutive in order to turn the LED on. (Steady)
• The battery fuse test fails. (Steady)
• The battery test is in progress (Flashing).
ResetA manual or system reset command clears all battery related alarms and LED signals if the alarm condition does not exist anymore.
• The battery test mode is not affected by the reset command.
• An additional reset command is provided. The path is: COMMANDS/BAT TEST CONT RST. It has to be executed after the DEFECTIVE battery has been replaced with a new one.
![Page 96: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
5–22 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 8: Battery Backup System wiring diagram
PATH: SETTINGS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > BATTERY BACKUP
BATT TEST CYC TIME
Range: 48 to 9000 hrs in steps of 1 hrDefault: 168 min
This setting defines the battery test cycle time, which is how often the battery test will be performed. The initial value of 168 hours is equal to one week.
BATT TEST DURATION
Range: 1 to 30 min in steps of 1 minDefault: 15 hrs
This setting defines the battery test duration time.
~1
~2
~4
~3
~5
~6
~8
~9
~11
~10
~12
~13
~7
~14
BATTERY TESTING
CONTACT INPUT 1 +
BATTERY CHARGING
CONTACT INPUT 2 +
CONTACT INPUT 3 +
CONTACT INPUT 4 +
CONTACT INPUT 5 +
CONTACT INPUT 6 +
COMMON
VT INPUT
SURGE
+
+
+
-
-
-
CHARGER
INPUT
BATTERY
DC
LO
AD
+-
+
-
POWER
SUPPLY
24V
DC
12V BATTERY 12V BATTERY
+ + -
-
IO_E
FU
SE
Load for
battery
status check
D3
D2
D1
891873.cdr
![Page 97: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–23
BATT TEST LIMIT
Range: 1 to 20 in steps of 1Default: 2
This setting defines the limit of the number of battery tests. When the number of consecutive unsuccessful battery tests reaches this limit, the BATTERY TO REPLACE alarm is raised.
Charger controller The Charger Controller has the following features:
• 10 Amp Capacity: The charger can facilitate a total of 10 amps to charge the battery and power the load.
• Temperature Compensation: The charger has an internal temperature sensor and varies charging voltages accordingly.
• 3-stage Operation: The charger uses a 3 stage system to optimize lead acid battery charging. (Refer to graph for typical charging pattern).
• Low Voltage Disconnect: Optionally, you may connect the battery's load (up to 10 amps) to the charger. If the voltage drops to 20V, the load will be disconnected from the battery after approximately one minute. The LVALERT signal (open drain) may be used to gracefully shut down equipment during the one minute. The load is reconnected when the battery is charged to approximately 24V, or when the recessed reset button is pressed.
The controller terminals are listed below:
• -BATTERY - Negative Battery terminal
• +BATTERY - Positive Battery terminal
• +LOAD - Positive Load terminal
• -LOAD - Negative Load terminal
• LVALERT - Low Voltage Disconnect Signal, Active Low
• -SOLAR - Negative Input terminal
• +SOLAR - Positive Input terminal
Charger controlleroperation
A microcontroller reads the battery and power input voltages, along with a set of internal timers and other logic, and determines what the state of the switches (FETs) should be. The two switches are controlled and activated independently, such that either one, both, or neither switch can be activated at any given time.
![Page 98: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
5–24 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 9: BMS Charge Graph
The graph above shows an ideal charging cycle typically found after a lead acid battery has discharged overnight. The red line (upper) indicates the battery terminal voltage and the green line (lower) indicates the charging current supplied to the battery.When the charger is first connected, or when the battery voltage drops below approximately 2.15V per cell, the charger enters bulk (fast) mode, where it attempts to bring the voltage to approximately 2.45V per cell. At this point, top-off mode is entered. When the charger senses that the battery is no longer taking a charge, float mode is entered where the voltage is lowered and maintained at approximately 2.3V per cell.The current for the load will come from the solar/power input when available, and the battery in that case will provide power filtering and smoothing to the load, while at the same time maintaining a float/trickle charge from the power source. The battery effectively acts as a large capacitor when connected in this manner
Battery safetyinformation
To prevent fire or chemical burns:
• Do not attempt to recharge batteries after removal from the unit.
• Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture the batteries.
• Do not short the external contacts of the batteries.
• Do not immerse the batteries in water.
• Do not expose to temperatures higher than 80°C (176°F).
• The batteries are recyclable. They contain lead and pose a hazard to the environment and human health if not disposed of properly. Return the battery to a factory authorized service center or refer to local codes for proper disposal requirements.
• Do not open or mutilate batteries. They contain an electrolyte which is toxic and harmful to the skin and eyes.
• Replace batteries with the same number and type of batteries as originally installed.
To prevent personal injury from hazardous energy:
• Remove watches, rings, or other metal objects.
![Page 99: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–25
• Use tools with insulated handles.
• Do not place tools or metal parts on top of batteries.
• When removing and installing the new batteries, extreme care must be used not to short metal chassis parts across the battery terminals and not to short the batteries to each other. A battery can present a risk of electrical shock and high short circuit current.
CAUTION: To prevent personal injury, prepare the area and observe all materials-handling procedures when transporting a battery module. Battery modules weigh 5.7 kg (12.6 lb) each.
Replacementprocedure for
batteries
NOTE
NOTE: Replace all battery modules at the same time.
1. Servicing of batteries should be performed or supervised by Qualified Service Technician and the required precautions. Keep unauthorized personnel away from batteries.
2. Remove the battery fuse (if present) prior to replacement.
3. Disconnect the negative cable (wire label BATT- ROG-B) from the right battery black terminal.
4. Disconnect the positive cable from the right battery red terminal.
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the left battery black terminal.
6. Disconnect the positive cable (wire label BATT+ BATT-FS) from the left battery red terminal.
7. Remove the battery securing strap.
8. Remove both batteries.
9. Secure two new same type of batteries back to back.
10. Reconnect the positive cable (wire label BATT+ BATT-FS) to the left battery red terminal.
11. Reconnect the negative cable to the left battery black terminal.
12. Reconnect the positive cable to the right battery red terminal.
13. Reconnect the negative cable (wire label BATT- ROG-B) to the right battery black terminal.
14. Secure the battery securing strap.
15. Replace the battery fuse.
![Page 100: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
5–26 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
S3 Configuration
Figure 10: Configuration menu
![Page 101: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–27
S3 CONFIGURATION
SETPOINT GROUP 1
SETPOINT GROUP 2
SETPOINT GROUP 3
AUTO SECTIONALIZING
WEARING MONITOR
S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1,2,3
PHASE IOC
PHASE OVERCURRENT
NTRL OVERCURRENT
OVERVOLTAGE
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
POWER LOSS
UNDERVOLTAGE
▼
891858.cdr
S3 PHASE IOC
PH IOC FUNCTION
PH IOC PKP
PH IOC DELAY
PH IOC BLOCK
▼
S3 PHASE OVERCURRENT
PH TOC FUNCTION
PH TOC PKP
PH TOC CURVE
PH TOC TDM
PH TOC RESET TIME
PH TOC BLOCK
▼
S3 NTRL OVERCURRENT
NTRL IOC FUNCTION
NTRL IOC PKP
NTRL IOC DELAY
NTRL IOC BLOCK
▼
S3 OVERVOLTAGE
PH OV FUNCTION
PH OV PKP
PH OV DELAY
PH OV PHASES
PH OV BLOCK
▼
S3 UNDERVOLTAGE
PH UV FUNCTION
PH UV
PH UV CURVE
PKP
PH UV DELAY
PH UV PHASES
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
PH UV BLOCK
▼
S3 VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
VOLTAGE UNBAL FUNC
VOLTAGE UNBAL PKP
VOLTAGE UNBL DELAY
VOLTAGE UNBL BLOCK
▼
S3 POWER LOSS
MIN PH CURR PICKUP
MIN PH VOLT PICKUP
POWER LOSS DELAY
▼
S3 AUTOSECTIONALIZING
AUTO SEC FUNCTION
IOC DPO TIME DELAY
TRIP COUNT LIMIT
AUTO SECT MODE
AUTO SECT DELAY
REVERSE PWR DETECT
REVERSE PWR PKP
REVERSE PWR DELAY
AUTO SECT TIMEOUT
▼
S3 WEARING MONITOR
ACT CNTR FUNCT
OPEN CNTER LIMIT
CLOSE CNTER LIMIT
ARC CURRENT FUNCT
ARC CURRENT BL0CK
KI2t MAXIMUM LIMIT
KI2t INTEGRAL TIME
▼
![Page 102: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
5–28 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Phase IOCThe relay has one Instantaneous Overcurrent detection function Phase IOC. It consists of three separate Instantaneous Overcurrent blocks; one per phase, with identical settings.PATH: SETTINGS > S3 CONFIGURATION > S3 SETTING GROUP 1/2/3 > PHASE IOC
PH IOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the Phase IOC function. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Phase IOC operation, and the IOC function is selected as Enabled, and will self-reset when the operating condition clears.
PH IOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 8.00 in steps of 0.01 x CTDefault: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup level in per times CT. For example, a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH IOC PKP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 sDefault: 0.00 s
This setting provides a selection for the time delay used to delay the operation of the protection function.
PH IOC BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 8, Virtual InputDefault: Off
There is one blocking input provided in the Phase IOC menu. The selection of the block can include Contact inputs, Virtual Inputs and Virtual Outputs.
![Page 103: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–29
Figure 11: PH IOC - logic diagram
Phase TOCThe settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce pickup and alarm condition per phase. The TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the current on any phase is above the PKP value. The TOC alarm flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the measured current drops below 97-
SE
TTI
NG
PH
IOC
FUN
CTI
ON
Dis
ab
led
=0
En
ab
led
=1
SE
TTI
NG
PH
IOC
BLO
CK
Off
=0
Ph
ase
AC
urr
en
t(IA
)
OR
AN
D
SE
TTI
NG
PH
IOC
PIC
KU
P:
SE
TTI
NG
PH
IOC
PK
PD
ELA
Y
OR
AN
D
Co
ldL
oa
dP
KP
Blo
ck
Inp
uts
Ph
ase
BC
urr
en
t(IB
)
Ph
ase
CC
urr
en
t(IC
)
Ph
ase
Cu
rre
nts
RU
N
RU
N
RU
N
IA>
PIC
KU
P
IB>
PIC
KU
P
IC>
PIC
KU
P
Ph
ase
IOC
AO
P
Ph
ase
IOC
BO
P
Ph
ase
IOC
CO
PPh
ase
IOC
OP
Eve
nt
Re
cord
er
-LE
D: A
larm
t PK
P
t PK
P
t PK
P
0 0 0
Me
ssa
ge
89
18
30
.cd
r
![Page 104: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
5–30 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
98% of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. The selection of Definite Time with the base time delay of 0.1 s is multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example the operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s.SETTINGSPATH: SETTINGS > S3 DETECTION FUNCTION > SETTINGS GROUP 1 > PHASE OVERCURRENT
PH TOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
This setting enables the TOC detection function. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Phase TOC operation and will self-reset when the operation clears.
PH TOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 8.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CTDefault: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the Time Overcurrent pickup level. For example, a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into a 270 A primary current.
PH TOC CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short, User Curve, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve BDefault: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected TOC inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is appropriate, a custom User curve, or FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more detail on their configurations and usages.
PH TOC TDM
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times greater than the PKP level, the operation of the element will not occur before an elapsed time from pickup, of 495 ms.
PH TOC RESET TIME
Range: Instantaneous, LinearDefault: Instantaneous
The “instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the Reset threshold. The “linear” reset method can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
PH TOC BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10[8], Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Elements 1 to 16Default: Off
One blocking input is provided in the Phase TOC menu. When the selected blocking input - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turns on, the Phase TOC function will be blocked.
![Page 105: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–31
Figure 12: Phase Time Overcurrent logic diagram
TOC curves DESCRIPTION
SE
TP
OIN
TS
Ph
ase
Acu
rre
nt
(IA
)
SE
TT
ING
PH
TO
CF
UN
CT
ION
:
En
ab
led
=0
PH
TO
CP
ICK
UP
:
PH
TO
CC
UR
VE
:
PH
TO
CT
DM
:
AND
Ph
ase
Bcu
rre
nt
(IB
)
Ph
ase
Ccu
rre
nt
(IC
)
OR
Eve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
LE
D:
PH
AS
EO
VE
RC
UR
RE
NT
ORE
ve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
Co
ldL
oa
dP
KP
Ph
ase
Cu
rre
nts
Ad
just
Ph
ase
TO
CP
KP
PH
TO
CP
HA
OP
PH
TO
CP
HB
OP
PH
TO
CP
HC
OP
Me
ssa
ge
:
PH
TO
CO
P
PH
TO
CP
HA
PK
P
PH
TO
CP
HB
PK
P
PH
TO
CP
HC
PK
P
PH
TO
CP
KP
PH
TO
CR
ES
ET
TIM
E:
RU
NIA
>P
ICK
UP
RU
NIB
>P
ICK
UP
RU
NIC
>P
ICK
UP
Ad
just
PK
P
Ad
just
PK
P
Ad
just
PK
P
SE
TT
ING
PH
TO
CB
LO
CK
Off
=0
89
18
66
.cd
r
LE
D:A
LA
RM
OR
Ph
ase
IOC
OP
(Fro
mIO
CE
lem
en
t)
![Page 106: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
5–32 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The relay has a total of two phase, two neutral, and two ground/sensitive ground time overcurrent elements. The programming of the time-current characteristics of these elements is identical in all cases and will only be covered in this section. The required curve is established by programming a Pickup Current, Curve Shape, Curve Multiplier, and Reset Time. The Curve Shape can be either a standard shape or a user-defined shape programmed with the FlexCurve™ feature.Accurate coordination may require changing the time overcurrent characteristics of particular elements under different conditions. For picking up a cold load, a different time-current characteristic can be produced by increasing the pickup current value. The following setpoints are used to program the time-current characteristics.
• <Element_Name> PICKUP: The pickup current is the threshold current at which the time overcurrent element starts timing. There is no intentional ‘dead band’ when the current is above the pickup level. However, accuracy is only guaranteed above a 1.5 per unit pickup level. The dropout threshold is 98% of the pickup threshold. Enter the pickup current corresponding to 1 per unit on the time overcurrent curves as a multiple of the source CT. For example, if 100: 5 CTs are used and a pickup of 90 amps is required for the time overcurrent element, enter “0.9 x CT”.
• <Element_Name> CURVE: Select the desired curve shape. If none of the standard curve shapes is appropriate, a custom FlexCurve™ can be created by entering the trip times at 80 different current values; see S2 SYSTEM SETUP > FLEXCURVE A. Curve formulas are given for use with computer based coordination programs. Calculated trip time values are only valid for I / Ipu > 1. Select the appropriate curve shape and multiplier, thus matching the appropriate curve with the protection requirements. The available curves are shown in the table below.
• <Element_Name> MULTIPLIER: A multiplier setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time direction. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, trip times are directly proportional to the value of the time multiplier setpoint. For example, all trip times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values.
When Timed Over-Current is programmed with Definite time, the operating time is obtained after multiplication of the selected Multiplier (TDM) by a 0.1 s base line. For example, selection of TDM = 5 would lead to a 0.5 s operating time.
• <Element_Name> RESET: Time overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal ‘energy capacity’ memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 99% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units. With this setpoint, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the following equation.
ANSI GE TYPE IAC IEC OTHER
Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Curve A (BS142) Definite Time
Very Inverse Very Inverse Curve B (BS142) Flexcurve ATM
Normally Inverse Inverse Curve C (BS142) Flexcurve BTM
Moderately Inverse Short Inverse IEC Short Inverse User Curve
![Page 107: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–33
where: TRESET = reset time in seconds; E = energy capacity reached (per unit); M = curve multiplier; CR = characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, and FlexCurves™; 8 for IEC)TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICSANSI CurvesThe ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI C37.90 curve classifications for extremely, very, normally, and moderately inverse. The ANSI curves are derived from the following formula:
where:T = trip time (seconds); M = multiplier value; I = input current; Ipu = pickup current setpoint; A, B, C, D, E = constants
Table 4: ANSI Curve Constants
ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 –0.2840 4.0505
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 –4.1899 9.1272
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 –0.0800 0.1271
![Page 108: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
5–34 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds)
IEC CurvesFor European applications, the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, and Short Inverse. The formulae for these curves are:
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current setpoint, K, E = constants.
Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely Inverse
0.5 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.0 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.0 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.0 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.0 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.0 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.0 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.5 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.0 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.0 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.0 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.0 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.0 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.0 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally Inverse
0.5 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.0 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.0 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.0 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.0 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.0 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.0 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.5 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.0 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.0 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.0 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.0 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.0 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.0 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465
![Page 109: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–35
Table 6: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants
Table 7: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds)
IAC CurvesThe curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
IEC (BS) Curve Shape K E
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040
Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Short Time
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518
![Page 110: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
5–36 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current setpoint, A to E = constants.
Table 8: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants
Table 9: IAC Curve Trip Times
USER Curves
IAC Curve Shape A B C D E
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221
Multiplier (TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC Short Inverse
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493
![Page 111: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–37
The relay provides a selection of user definable curve shapes used by the time overcurrent protection. The User curve is programmed by selecting the proper parameters in the formula:
A, P, Q, B, K - selectable curve parameters within the ranges from the table: D is the Time Dial Multiplier.User Curve can be used on multiple elements only if the time dial multiplier is the same for each element.V = I/IPICKUP (TOC setting) is the ratio between the measured current and the pickup setting.
NOTE
NOTE: The maximum trip time for the User Curve is limited to 65.535 seconds. The User Curve can be used for one protection situation only.
Figure 13: USER curve configuration settings
FlexcurvesProspective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit , then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Click the Initialize button to populate the pickup values with the points from the curve specified by the "Select Curve" setting and the "Multiply" value. These values can then be edited to create a custom curve. Click on the Clear FlexCurve Data button to reset all pickup values to zero.Curve data can be imported from CSV (comma-separated values) files by clicking on the Open button. Likewise, curve data can be saved in CSV format by clicking the Save button. CSV is a delimited data format with fields separated by the comma character and records separated by new lines. Refer to IETF RFC 4180 for additional details.
Parameters A B P Q K
Range 0 to 125 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 2 0 to 1.999
Step 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
Unit sec sec NA NA sec
Default Value 0.05 0 0.04 1.0 0
![Page 112: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
5–38 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The curve shapes for the two FlexCurves are derived from the following equations.
In the above equations, Toperate represents the operate time in seconds, TDM represents the multiplier setting, I represents the input current, Ipickup represents the value of the pickup current setting, Tflex represents the FlexCurve™ time in seconds.
Figure 14: Flexcurve™ configuration settings
The following settings are available for each custom Flexcurve™.
Select CurveRange: ANSI Moderately Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Extremely Inverse, IEEE Normally Inverse, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, IAC Extreme Inv, IAC Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, User Curve, FlexCurve B (Note: For FlexCurve A, you can select FlexCurve B as the setpoint, and vice versa for FlexCurve B.)Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting specifies a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™. Must be used before Initialization is implemented (see Initialization below).
![Page 113: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–39
MultiplyRange: 0.01 to 30.00 in steps of 0.01Default: 1.00
This setting provides selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the operation of the element will not occur before a time elapse of 495 ms from pickup.
Initialization
Used after specifying a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™ (see Select Curve and Multiply above). When the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked, the pickup settings will be populated with values specified by the curve selected in this setting.
1.03 × Pickup, ..., 20.00 × PickupRange: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1Default: 0 ms
These settings specify the time to operate at the following pickup levels 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into a continuous curve by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the operate time for each selected pickup point.
NOTE
NOTE: Each FlexCurve can be configured to provide inverse time characteristic to more than one Time Overcurrent Element. However, for computation of the curve operating times, one must take into account the setting of the Time Delay Multiplier from the FlexCurve menu, and the Time Delay Multiplier setting from TOC menu. The true TDM applied to the TOC element when FlexCurve is selected is the result from the multiplication of both TDM settings. For example, for FlexCurve Multiplier = 5, and Phase TOC Multiplier = 2, the total Time Dial Multiplier will be equal to 10. To avoid confusion, it is suggested to keep the multiplier from the TOC menu equal to 1, and change only the multiplier from the selected FlexCurve. This way, one can see from the FlexCurve setup, the curve operating times as related to the multiples of pickup.
Neutral overcurrentThe relay has one Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent detection function. The settings of this function are applied to the calculated neutral current as a pickup flag. The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value. The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup without operation if the neutral current drops below 97 to 98% of the pickup value. PATH: SETTINGS > S3 CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS > S3 SETTINGS GROUP 1/2/3 > NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
NTRL IOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the Neutral IOC function. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Neutral IOC operation, with the IOC function selected as Enabled, and will self-reset when the operating condition clears.
NTRL IOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 8 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CTDefault: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup level specified per times CT.
![Page 114: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
5–40 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
NTRL IOC DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01Default: 0.00 s
This setting provides a selection for pickup time delay used to delay the operation of this function.
NTRL IOC BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
There is one blocking input provided in the Neutral IOC menu. The selection of the block can include Contact Input, Virtual Input, and Virtual Output.
![Page 115: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–41
Figure 15: Neutral IOC - logic diagram
SE
TT
ING
Ne
utr
alcu
rre
nt
(IN
)
RU
N
SE
TT
ING
NT
RL
IOC
BL
OC
K
Off
=0
NT
RL
IOC
PIC
KU
P
IN>
PIC
KU
P
OR
AND
Eve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
Co
ldL
oa
dP
KP
Co
mp
ute
db
yth
ere
lay
Blo
ck
Inp
uts
SE
TT
ING
NT
RL
IOC
FU
NC
TIO
N:
Dis
able
d=
0
Enable
d
NT
RL
IOC
PK
PD
LY
SE
TT
ING
t PK
P
0
LE
D:A
LA
RM
AND
LE
D:
NE
UT
RA
L
OV
ER
CU
RR
EN
T
Ne
utr
alIO
CP
KP
Me
ssa
ge
:
Ne
utr
alIO
CO
P
89
18
31
.cd
r
Me
ssa
ge
:
![Page 116: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
5–42 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Phase overvoltageThe Phase OV protection can be used to protect voltage sensitive feeder loads and circuits against sustained overvoltage conditions. The protection element can be used to generate an alarm when the voltage exceeds the selected voltage level for the specified time delay.PATH: SETTINGS > S3 DETECTION FUNCTIONS > S3 SETTINGS GROUP 1/2/3 > PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
PH OV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the Phase OV function. The ALARM LED will flash upon OV operation with the phase OV selected as Enabled, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears.
PH OV PKP
Range: 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Default: 1.25 x VT
This setting defines the phase OV pickup level, and is usually set to a level above which some voltage sensitive loads and feeder components may experience over-excitation and dangerous overheating conditions.
PH OV DELAY
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before OV operation.
PH OV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All ThreeDefault: Any One
This setting selects the combination of overvoltage conditions with respect to the number of the phase voltages to the overvoltage pickup setting.
PH OV BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
There is one blocking input provided in the Phase Overvoltage menu. The selection of the block can include Contact Inputs, Virtual Inputs, and Virtual Outputs.
![Page 117: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–43
Figure 16: Phase Overvoltage logic diagram
Ph
ase
Vo
lta
ge
Inp
uts
(asso
cia
ted
se
tpo
ints
)
SE
TT
ING
S
Va
b
SE
TT
ING
PH
OV
FU
NC
TIO
N:
Dis
ab
led
=0
En
ab
led
PH
OV
PIC
KU
P:
AND
Vb
c
Vca
LE
D:A
LA
RM
AND
SE
TT
ING
PH
OV
BL
OC
K
Off
=0
RU
N
RU
N
RU
NV
an
Vb
n
Vcn
No
ne
De
lta
Wye
OV
PK
PE
ventR
ecord
er
Ph
ase
Ove
rvo
lta
ge
Me
ssa
ge
s
Va
>P
ICK
UP
Vb
>P
ICK
UP
Vc
>P
ICK
UP
All
Thre
e
Opera
tefo
r
pro
gra
mm
ed
com
bin
ation
Any
Tw
o
Any
One
SE
TT
ING
PH
OV
PH
AS
ES
:
OR
PH
AS
EO
VD
EL
AY
:
SE
TT
ING
t PK
P
89
18
67
.cd
r
LE
D:O
VE
RV
OLTA
GE
![Page 118: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
5–44 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Phase undervoltageFor voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.PATH: SETTINGS > S3 DETECTION FUNCTIONS > S3 SETTINGS GROUP 1/2/3 > PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
PH UV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
The selection of Enabled setting enables Phase UV function. The LED “ALARM” will flash upon UV operating condition, with the phase UV selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears.
PH UV PKP
Range: 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Default: 0.75 x VT
This setting defines the phase UV pickup level, and it is usually set to a level, below which the drawn current from voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors may cause dangerous motor overheating conditions.
PH UV CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse TimeDefault: Inverse Time
This setting selects the type of inverse time curve, to define the time of undervoltage operation based on selected UV time delay, and the actual undervoltage condition with respect to selected UV pickup.
PH UV DELAY
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies a time delay, used by the selected PHASE UV CURVE type of timing to calculate time before UV operation.
PH UV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All ThreeDefault: Any One
This setting selects the combination of undervoltage conditions with respect to the number of phase voltages under the undervoltage pickup setting. Selection of the “Any Two”, or “All Three” setting would effectively rule out the case of a single VT fuse failure.
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01Default: 0.30 X VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired UV operation before voltage becomes available.
PH UV BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 8, Virtual Input1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
There is one blocking input provided in the Phase OverVoltage menu. The selection of the block can include Contact Input, Virtual Input and Virtual Outputs.
![Page 119: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–45
Figure 17: Phase Undervoltage - logic diagram
Phase
Voltage
Inputs
(associa
ted
setp
oin
ts)
SE
TP
OIN
TS
Vab
SE
TP
OIN
T
PH
UV
FU
NC
TIO
N
Dis
able
d=
0
Enable
d=
1
PH
UV
PIC
KU
P:
PH
UV
CU
RV
E:
PH
UV
DE
LA
Y:
AND
Vbc
Vca
UV
OP
/DP
O
Eve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
SE
TP
OIN
TS
PH
UV
BLO
CK
Off
=0
RU
N
RU
N
RU
N
PIC
KU
P
Van
Vbn
Vcn
None
PIC
KU
P
PIC
KU
P
Van
or
Vab
>M
inim
um
Vbn
or
Vbc
>M
inim
um
Vcn
or
Vca
>M
inim
um
PH
UV
MIN
VO
LTA
GE
:
SE
TP
OIN
T
AND AND AND
Delta
Wye
All
Thre
e
Opera
tefo
r
pro
gra
mm
ed
com
bin
ation
Any
Tw
o
Any
One
SE
TP
OIN
T
PH
UV
PH
AS
ES
:
OR
Phase
Underv
oltage
Messages
LE
D:A
LA
RM
89
18
36
.cd
r
LE
D:
UN
DE
RV
OLTA
GE
AND
UV
PK
PE
ve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
![Page 120: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
5–46 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Phase undervoltagecurves
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below. The operating time is given by:
Eq. 1
Where: T = Operating TimeD = Undervoltage Delay setpointV = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary VoltageVpu = Pickup Level
NOTE
NOTE: At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage Delay setpoint.
Figure 18: Inverse time undervoltage curves
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
Voltage unbalanceFor the DGC, unbalance is defined as the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage, (V2/V1) X 100%. If enabled, an alarm occurs once the unbalance level equals and exceeds the set pickup for the set period of time. PATH: SETTINGS > S3 CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS > S3 SETTINGS GROUP 1/2/3 > VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
VOLTAGE UNBAL FUNC
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
This setting enables the Voltage Unbalance functionality.
VOLTAGE UNBAL PKP
Range: 4% to 40% in steps of 1%Default: 15%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Voltage Unbalance condition.
T =D
1- V/Vpu
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
0.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Tim
e(s
eco
nd
s)
![Page 121: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–47
VOLTAGE UNBL DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 sDefault: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the Voltage Unbalance condition.
VOLTAGE UNBL BLOCK
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
There is one blocking input provided for the Voltage Unbalance feature. When the selected blocking input is ON, the Voltage Unbalance function is blocked.
![Page 122: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
5–48 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 19: Voltage Unbalance - logic diagram
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
VO
LTA
GE
UN
BA
LF
UN
C:
Dis
able
d=
0
Enable
d=
1
VO
LTA
GE
UN
BL
PK
P:
AND
AND
SE
TT
ING
VO
LTA
GE
UN
BL
BLO
CK
Off
=0
RU
N
LE
D:A
LA
RM
EventR
ecord
er
Voltage
Unbala
nce
Message
UN
BA
L>
=P
ICK
UP
VO
LTA
GE
UN
BL
DE
LA
Y:
SE
TT
ING
t PK
P
89
18
68
.cd
r
AC
TU
AL
VA
LU
E
Sourc
esid
enegative
sequence
voltage
(V2)
Sourc
esid
epositiv
e
sequence
voltage
(V1)
(V2
/V1
)x1
00
%
![Page 123: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–49
Power lossThe Power Loss detection function is used to detect a power loss condition in each phase of the power distribution line. After opening the upstream breaker, the DGC has to confirm that the voltage and current levels of the line are below a minimum threshold.When the switch type is selected as ’no-load,’ the opening or closing commands of the switch are interlocked with this function. Any OPEN or CLOSE command will be blocked unless the currents and voltages of each phase fall below minimum set values.This function is also used by the auto-sectionalizing function to detect the power loss condition after a previous IOC fault detection. When the switch is closed, the power loss detection of the source side is used to control the opening commands execution. However, for DGC devices provided with voltage on both sides of the line, the power loss condition has to be established in both sides before closing a no-load switch into the power line. PATH: SETTINGS > S3 CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS > S3 SETTINGS GROUP 1/2/3 > POWER LOSS
MIN PH CURR PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 0.40xCT in steps of 0.01xCTDefault: 0.03xCT
This setting is used to detect the circuit breaker open condition. When a phase current falls below this threshold and at the same time the voltage of the same phase falls below its minimum value, the power loss condition of this phase is declared after the power loss delay expires.
MIN PH VOLT PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 0.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVTDefault: 0.05xVT
This setting is used to detect the circuit breaker open condition. When a phase voltage falls below this threshold and at the same time the current of the same phase falls below its minimum value, the power loss condition of this phase is declared after the power loss delay expires.
POWER LOSS DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 sDefault: 0.05 s
This setting specifies the time delay before a power loss condition.
![Page 124: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
5–50 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 20: Power Loss - logic diagram
RE
LAY
STA
TUS
InS
erv
ice
Ph
ase
AC
urr
en
t(Ia
)
Ph
ase
BC
urr
en
t(Ib
)
Ph
ase
CC
urr
en
t(Ic
)
SE
TTI
NG
VT
INP
UT
Wye
=0
De
lta
=1
So
urc
e[lo
ad
]V
olt
ag
e
Wye
Va
b
Vb
n
Vcn
SE
TTI
NG
MIN
PH
CU
RR
PIC
KU
P
Ib<
PIC
KU
P
SE
TTI
NG
MIN
PH
VO
LTP
ICK
UP
RU
N
RU
N
RU
N
2V
in>
Vca
>1
.5V
in
RU
N
RU
N
RU
N
Ia<
PIC
KU
P
Ic<
PIC
KU
P
V<
PIC
KU
P
V<
PIC
KU
P
V<
PIC
KU
P
2V
in>
Vb
c>
1.5
Vin
2V
in>
Va
b>
1.5
Vin
SE
TTI
NG
PO
WE
RLO
SS
DE
LAY
SE
TTI
NG
PO
WE
RLO
SS
DE
LAY
SE
TTI
NG
PO
WE
RLO
SS
DE
LAY
t PK
P
t PK
P
t PK
P
De
lta
Va
n
Vb
c
Vca
MA
X
MA
X
MA
X
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
AN
D
OR
PW
RLO
SS
SR
C(L
OA
D) P
HA
PW
RLO
SS
SR
C(L
OA
D) P
HB
PW
RLO
SS
SR
C(L
OA
D) P
HC
-LE
D: A
CP
OW
ER
LOS
S
-LE
D: A
LAR
M
Fle
xLo
gic
Op
era
nd
s&
Eve
nt
Re
cord
er
Fle
xLo
gic
Op
era
nd
s&
Eve
nt
Re
cord
er
PW
RLO
SS
SR
C(L
OA
D)
![Page 125: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–51
Auto sectionalizingThe Auto Sectionalizing function of the DGCS is designed to control a switch separating the sections of a feeder. Normally there are several switches within one feeder, each controlled by a separate DGCS. The feeder is protected by a circuit breaker installed on the source side. When there is a fault on the feeder, Auto Sectionalizing functions in all feeder DGCS units coordinate the actions of the breaker using feeder switches. At the end of the switching sequence, the switch at the entry point of the faulty section remains open, allowing the upstream sections to resume normal operation.As indicated above, the distribution feeders are equipped with feeder switches (pole-top, pad-mount) that can segment the feeder into electrically isolated sections. Distribution circuits called “laterals” (labeled as ‘Loads’) are connected between two consecutive switches. These are protected by over-current fuses and are not automated. An example of the circuit is depicted in the figure below.
Figure 21: Typical Distribution Circuit
For the topology shown above, the assumption is that there is a fault (F2) on Feeder 1. Circuit breaker 1 will start with the trip-reclose operating profile shown below.
![Page 126: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
5–52 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 22: Circuit Breaker Operating Profile - F2 fault condition
The circuit breaker operating steps on the profile are numbered from 1 to 12. The height of the profile step is scaled to the current and the length of the profile step is scaled to the duration of the state. The duration of steps and the number of re-closing attempts can be set on the circuit breaker controller. Usually the entire CB fault operating profile completes within 60 seconds. The number of re-closing attempts must be set to the number of feeder switches, incremented by 1. Usually, the maximum number of re-closing attempts is 4, which limits the number of sectionalizing switches to 3. In this example, there are 3 re-closing attempts (events 3, 7 and 11).Each DGCS is equipped with a CT set that is installed at the source side of the corresponding switch. Using the current readout, DGCs will detect the fault current if the fault occurred downstream of the switch. Both DGCs are in counting mode. They are counting events ‘Overcurrent followed by power supply loss’. For the last switch on the feeder (furthermost from the circuit breaker) the count limit must be set to 2 and it should increment by 1 for each switch positioned closer to the circuit breaker. In this case the DGCS_11 count limit is 3 and the DGCS_12 count limit is 2. When a DGCS unit count reaches its limit, the switch will open.Two cases will be considered:
F1. The fault occurred between the Tie breaker / switch and DGCS_12. After the Auto Sectionalizing sequence is complete, the DGCS_12 will open during CB event 6. After CB step 7 is complete, the nominal current will flow through the feeder and the faulty feeder segment will be sectionalized.F2. The fault occurred between the DGCS_11 and DGCS_12. After the Auto Sectionalizing sequence is complete, the DGCS_11 will open during CB event 10. After CB step 11 is complete, the nominal current will flow through the feeder and the faulty feeder segment will be sectionalized.
NOTE
NOTE: Each DGCS is set to detect a reverse power condition. If such a condition has been detected, the Auto Sectionalizing sequence will operate, but the “Open Switch” command will not be executed.
FLEXLOGICAuto Sectionalizing function of the DGCS controls 7 Flexlogic operands:OC FOL BY PWR LOSSTRIP COUNT = 0TRIP COUNT = 1TRIP COUNT = 2
![Page 127: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–53
TRIP COUNT = 3TRIP COUNT = 4TRIP COUNT = 5The Auto Sectionalizing function of the DGCS uses 4 Flexlogic operands that are controlled by other elements:Phase IOC A OP (from Phase IOC element)Phase IOC B OP (from Phase IOC element)Phase IOC C OP (from Phase IOC element)NTRL IOC OP (from NTRL IOC element)PATH: SETTINGS > S3 CONFIGURATION > AUTO SECTIONALIZIN
AUTO SECT FUNCTION Range: Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled
This setting enables the Auto Sectionalizing function.
IOC DPO TIME DELAY
Range: 0.05 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 sDefault: 0.20 s
When the overcurrent condition is detected, the IOC STATE alarm will be asserted. When the overcurrent condition clears, the IOC STATE alarm will stay active for the time selected in this setup. Within this time the condition ‘Overcurrent followed by power supply loss’ will be detected.
CB STATE INFO
Range: Local, RemoteDefault: Local
This setting selects the means of getting information on the circuit breaker state (opened or closed).
Local: Comparing currents and voltages with the minimum threshold.
Remote: Reading selected Contact Input (1 to x), Virtual Input (1 to 32), or Virtual Output (1 to 32). In addition, currents and voltages are compared with the minimum threshold to decide on the state of the circuit breaker.
CB TYPE
Range: 1 Unit (3-Pole), 3 Units (1-Pole)Default: 1 Unit (3-Pole)
This setting has to match the type of circuit breaker installed on the source side of the feeder.
TRIP COUNT LIMIT
Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1Default: 2
This setting sets the number of CB trip cycles before the switch open command is initiated. For the last switch on the feeder (furthermost from the circuit breaker) the limit should be set to 2. The limit for the second last switch should be set to 3. The limit for the third last switch should be set to 4.
AUTO SECT MODE
Range: Timing mode, Counting modeDefault: Counting mode
This setting selects the mode of Auto Sectionalizing. In Timing mode, ‘Auto Sect Delay’ time should be set to the lowest value for the last switch on the feeder (furthermost from the circuit breaker). For the second last switch, the time should be longer, continuing in the same way to the first switch on the feeder.
![Page 128: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
5–54 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
AUTO SECT DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1s Default: 0.2 s
This setting selects the time delay between issuing and executing the Auto Sectionalizing command.
REVERSE PWR DETECT
Range: Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled
This setting selects the detection of the reverse power. When enabled, a reverse power condition triggers the message “REVERSE POWER.”
REVERSE PWR PKP
Range: 0 to -50000 kW in steps of 1kWDefault: -50 kW
This setting selects the pickup level for the reverse power detection. It is recommended to avoid setting zero for the pickup level since in that case the ‘no load’ condition will be interpreted as a ‘reverse power’ condition.
REVERSE PWR DELAY
Range: 0.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 sDefault: 0.5 s
This setting delays the reverse power detection. Reverse power has to be lower than the pickup value for more than the time in this setting, before the REVERSE POWER message is asserted.
AUTO SECT TIMEOUT
Range: 6 to 600 in steps of 1sDefault: 60 s
The Auto Sectionalizing sequence must be complete before this time elapses. If the time expires before the completion of the sequence, the sequence will reset. This time should be equal to the duration of the breaker switching sequence.
![Page 129: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–55
Figure 23: Auto Sectionalizing logic diagram - 1 of 2
SETTING
AUTO SECT FUNCTION
ENABLED = 1
OR
AN
D
NTRL IOC OP(from Neutral IOC element)
AN
D
SETTING (SYSTEM
SETUP)
CB STATE INFO
REMOTE = 0
LOCAL = 1
Status: CBa CLOSED(selected source)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OC FOL BY PWR LOSSPhase IOC C OP(from Phase IOC element)
Phase IOC A OP(from Phase IOC element)
Phase IOC B OP(from Phase IOC element) SETTING
IOC DPO TIME DELAY
0
200 ms
To page 2
Alarm:
IOC STATE
AS enabled
OR
Event recorder
SETTING (SYSTEM
SETUP)
SWITCH TYPE
NO LOAD = 0
LOAD = 1
OR
AN
D
OR
AN
DAN
D
OR
Power loss
Status: CB(3pole) CLOSED(selected source)
SETTING (SYSTEM
SETUP)
CB TYPE
3 UNITS(1 POLE) = 0
1 UNIT (3POLE) = 1
AN
DA
ND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Pwr Loss Src Ph A OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Pwr Loss Src Ph B OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Pwr Loss Src Ph C OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Pwr Loss Src OP
Status: CBb CLOSED(selected source)
Status: CBc CLOSED(selected source)
(from SYSTEM SETUP)
(from SYSTEM SETUP)891869.cdr
AN
D
![Page 130: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
5–56 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 24: Auto Sectionalizing logic diagram - 2 of 2
Wearing monitorThe DGCS provides counters for counting the switch OPEN and CLOSE actions. Every new OPEN action increments the content of the Flexlogic variable SWITCH OPEN COUNT. Equally, every new CLOSE action increments the content of the Flexlogic variable SWITCH CLOSE COUNT. Both variables are located in MAINTENANCE / M3 COUNTERS. The user can select the limit for each action separately. When a limit has been reached, a corresponding message is produced.
SE
TT
ING
AU
TO
SE
CT
DE
LA
Y
10
0m
s
0
AND
OR
AS
sw
itch
op
en
co
mm
an
d(t
o
Sw
itch
co
ntr
ol
log
ice
lem
en
t)
AND
TR
IPC
OU
NT
>=
TR
IP
CO
UN
TL
IMIT
SE
TT
ING
TR
IPC
OU
NT
LIM
IT
TR
IPC
OU
NT
>=
1
AND
SE
TT
ING
AU
TO
SE
CT
MO
DE
TIM
ING
MO
DE
=0
CO
UN
TIN
GM
OD
E=
1
AC
TU
AL
VA
LU
E
TR
IPC
OU
NT
SE
TT
ING
RE
VE
RS
EP
WR
PK
P
AND
Me
ssa
ge:
RE
VE
RS
EP
OW
ER
SE
TT
ING
RE
VE
RS
EP
WR
DE
TE
CT
EN
AB
LE
=1
Ala
rm:
FIR
ST
AS
TR
IP
SH
OT
CO
UN
TE
R
INC
RE
ME
NT
SH
OT
CO
UN
TE
R
RE
SE
TS
HO
T
CO
UN
TE
R01234
CO
UN
T
TR
IPC
OU
NT
=0
TR
IPC
OU
NT
=1
TR
IPC
OU
NT
=2
TR
IPC
OU
NT
=3
TR
IPC
OU
NT
=4
FL
EX
LO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
DS
SE
TT
ING
AU
TO
SE
CT
TIM
EO
UT
6.0
s
0
Me
ssa
ge:
AU
TO
SE
CT
TIM
EO
UT
LA
TC
H
S R
FL
EX
LO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
OC
FO
LB
YP
WR
LO
SS
OR
Ma
nu
alre
se
t
Re
mo
tere
se
t(fr
om
co
mm
s)
OR
LE
D:A
LA
RM
Fro
mp
ag
e1
RU
N
RU
N
AS
en
ab
led
Fro
mp
ag
e1
AS
en
ab
led
Ala
rm:
AS
LO
CK
OU
T
Eve
nt
reco
rde
r
Eve
nt
reco
rde
r
5T
RIP
CO
UN
T=
5
Fro
mp
ag
e1
Po
we
rlo
ss
RE
AL
PO
WE
R=<
RE
VE
RS
EP
OW
ER
PK
P
RU
N
AC
TU
AL
VA
LU
E
RE
AL
PO
WE
R
SE
TT
ING
RE
VE
RS
EP
WR
DE
LA
Y
50
0m
s0
891870.c
dr
LE
D:A
UT
OS
EC
TIO
NA
LIZ
ING
LO
CK
OU
T
![Page 131: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–57
The DGCS is provided with an Arcing Current Counter that calculates the energy of the arc created for every switch open action. The calculation is performed for each phase and it is based on the instantaneous value of the KI2t being integrated for the duration of the switch open action. Furthermore, the controller adds up the arc energy of every new switch open action, creating an accumulated count of this quantity for a long period of time. The accumulated arcing energy of phase A is saved in the Flexlogic variable KI2t SW COUNT PH A, as is the accumulated arcing energy of phases B and C. The controller provides for setting the limit for arcing energy and if any of the phases’ arcing energy value exceeds this limit, the alarm message is triggered. Usually, the switch manufacturer provides the maximum KI2t value and when this value is reached, the switch has to be repaired. This makes the Arcing Current function a very useful maintenance tool.The logic diagrams for the Switch Action Counter and the Arcing Current Counter are shown below.PATH: S3 CONFIGURATION > WEARING MONITOR
ACT CNTR FUNCT
Default: DisabledRange: Enabled, Disabled
This setting enables the functionality of the Switch Action Counter. It has two separate parts: one for counting open actions, and another for counting close actions of the switch. When enabled, every open or close action of the switch results in incrementing of the open or close count respectively.
OPEN CNTER LIMIT
Default: 9999Range: 1 to 9999 Steps 1
This is the maximum number of openings allowed for the controlled switch. When this value is exceeded, the message OP CNT LIM REACHED appears to signal this issue. Once the message is activated, it can be removed by resetting the open counter. The path of the reset command is: MAINTENANCE / M3 STATISTICS/ RESET COUNTERS / RESET OPEN COUNT. When the limit of 9999 is reached the Open Counter starts from zero.
CLOSE CNTER LIMIT
Default: 9999Range: 1 to 9999 Steps 1
This is the maximum number of closings allowed for the controlled switch. When this value is exceeded, the message CL CNT LIM REACHED appears to signal this issue. Once the message is activated, it can be removed by resetting the open counter. The path to the reset command is: MAINTENANCE / M3 STATISTICS / RESET COUNTERS / RESET CLOSE COUNT. When the limit of 9999 is reached the Close Counter starts from zero.
ARC CURRENT FUNCT
Default: DisabledRange: Enabled, Disabled
This setting enables the functionality of the Arcing Current Counter.
ARC CURRENT BLOCK
Default: DisabledRange: Off, Contact Inputs 1 to x, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32
This setting blocks the functionality of the Arcing Current Counter.
![Page 132: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
5–58 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
KI2t MAXIMUM LIMIT
Default: 9999.99Range: 0 to 9999.99 Steps: 0.01(KA)2s
This setting is programmed with the maximum I2t accumulated value. If the KI2t counter of one phase exceeds this level, a message KI2T LIMIT REACHED will appear to signal this issue.
Once the message is activated, it can be removed by resetting the KI2t counter. The path to the reset command is: MAINTENANCE / M3 RESET COUNTERS / RESET SW KI2t COUNT.
KI2t INTEGRAL TIME
Default: 0.03sRange: 0.03 to 0.25s Steps: 0.01s.
This is the integration time taken as the base (fixed opening time) for the calculation of KI2t. It should be set to the estimated duration of the arcing event.
![Page 133: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S3 CONFIGURATION
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–59
Figure 25: Switch Action Counter logic diagram
TO
TA
L=
LIM
IT
RU
N
SE
TP
OIN
T
Eve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
OP
CN
T L
IM R
EA
CH
ED
Message
SE
TP
OIN
T
AC
TC
NT
R F
UN
CT
Enable
d=
1
INI O
PE
N C
OU
NT
SE
TP
OIN
T
Incre
me
nt
Co
un
ter
OP
EN
CN
TE
R L
IMIT
OP
EN
CO
UN
T
AC
TU
AL
VA
LU
ES
Initia
l
Co
un
tC
ou
nte
r=
Initia
l co
un
t
+n
ew
co
un
t
RE
SE
TO
PE
N C
OU
NT
CO
MM
AN
D(M
3R
ES
ET
CO
UN
TE
RS
)
No
=0
Yes
Set to
Zero
SW
ITC
H O
PE
NE
D
FL
EX
LO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
TO
TA
L=
LIM
IT
RU
N
SE
TP
OIN
T
Eve
nt
Re
co
rde
r
CL
CN
T L
IM R
EA
CH
ED
Message
INI C
LO
SE
CO
UN
T
SE
TP
OIN
T
Incre
me
nt
Co
un
ter
CLO
SE
CN
TE
R L
IMIT
CLO
SE
CO
UN
T
AC
TU
AL
VA
LU
ES
Initia
l
Co
un
tC
ou
nte
r=
Initia
l co
un
t
+n
ew
co
un
t
RE
SE
TC
LO
SE
CO
UN
T
CO
MM
AN
D(M
3R
ES
ET
CO
UN
TE
RS
)
No
=0
Yes
Set to
Zero
SW
ITC
H C
LO
SE
D
FL
EX
LO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
891871.c
dr
![Page 134: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
5–60 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S3 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 26: Arcing Current Counter logic diagram
Fle
xLogic
Opera
nds
&
Eventre
cord
er
RU
N
KI2
tIn
teg
rate
KI2
tIN
TE
GR
AL
TIM
E:
SE
TT
ING
Ph
ase
AC
urr
en
t(Ia)
Ph
ase
AC
urr
en
t(Ib
)
Ph
ase
AC
urr
en
t(Ic
)
SW
AR
CC
UR
RF
UN
C:
SE
TT
ING
Dis
ab
led=
0
Enable
d=
1
SW
AR
CC
UR
RB
LO
CK:
SE
TT
ING
Dis
able
d=
0
RE
SE
TS
WK
I2t
CO
UN
T
CO
MM
AN
D(M
4R
ES
ET)
Dis
able
d=
0
SW
ITC
HO
PE
N
FL
EX
LO
GIC
AN
D
AN
D
RU
N
KI2
tIn
tegra
te
AN
D
RU
N
KI2
tIn
tegra
te
AN
D
T,sec
AN
D
OR
10
0m
s
↑↑
Ad
dto
Ac
cu
mu
lato
r
IA2
t
IB2
t
IC2t
Se
tA
llTo
Ze
ro
LA
TC
H
Ph
A
Ph
B
Ph
C
Fre
eze
cu
rre
nts
LA
TC
H
Se
lect
Hig
he
st
Va
lue
LA
TC
H
S( K
A)2
t>
Lim
it
KI2
tM
AX
LIM
IT
LE
D:
AL
AR
M
KI2
tLIM
ITR
EA
CH
ED
CO
UN
TE
RS
KI2
tS
WC
OU
NT
PH
A
KI2
tS
WC
OU
NT
PH
B
KI2
tS
WC
OU
NT
PH
C
89
18
72
.cd
r
![Page 135: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–61
S4 Controls
Figure 27: Controls menu
Remote controlPATH: S4 SETPOINTS > CONTROLS > REMOTE CONTROL
S4 REMOTE CONTROL
REMOTE OPEN
REMOTE CLOSE
REMOTE RESET
COMM BLOCK AUTO
COMM UNBLOCK AUTO
SAVE BLOCK AUTO
▼
891857.cdr
S4 CHANGE SETP GROUP
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
BLK GROUP CHANGE
SET GROUP 3 ACTIVE
▼
S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
▼
S4
CLP FUNCTION
COLD LOAD PICKUP
OUTAGE TIME
CLP BLOCKING TIME
CLP EXT INITIATE
BLOCK PH IOC
BLOCK NIOC
BLOCK OV
BLOCK UV
SELECT SETP GROUP
RAISE PH TOC PKP
▼
S4 CONTROLS
REMOTE CONTROL
C CONTROL
CHANGE SETP GROUP
VIRTUAL INPUTS
COLD LOAD PICKUP
▼
S4 SWITCH CONTROL
OPEN RESET TIME
BLOCK OPEN CMND
CLOSE RESET TIME
BLOCK CLOSE CMND
ALARM FUNCTION
ALARM DELAY
▼
![Page 136: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
5–62 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Off
This setting defines the input to trigger the open command to the switch. This input can be selected from the list of inputs including contact inputs, virtual inputs, protection or control operand, as well as input flags received from SCADA, or IEDs.
REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Disabled
This setting defines the input to trigger the close command to the switch. This input can be selected from the list of inputs including contact inputs, virtual inputs, protection or control operand, as well as input flags received from SCADA, or IEDs.
REMOTE RESET
Range: Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Off
This setting is used to reset the LEDs, alarms and target messages generated during some abnormal condition of the switch. The setting provides the selection of an input from a list of inputs that performs the reset action upon activation.
COMM BLOCK AUTO
Range: No, YesDefault: No
The Auto mode can be blocked remotely by asserting the command COMM BLOCK AUTO via communications. This can be done only by using the DGC PC program while in Remote control. In this case the switch can be controlled only remotely. This command is not visible on the HMI.
SAVE COMM BLK AUTO
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
While in Remote mode, the user can select to keep the Auto mode blocked during loss of communication or loss of power to the DGC-S, by setting the command SAVE COMM BLK AUTO, to “Enabled”. This will keep the Auto mode blocked after the communication or the power to the DGC-S has been restored.
COMM UNBLOCK AUTO
Range: No, YesDefault: Yes
Both the COMM BLOCK AUTO and the SAVE COMM BLK AUTO selections will reset upon issuing COMM UNBLOCK AUTO command. This command is not visible on the HMI.
Open/Close controlPATH: SETTINGS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 SWITCH CONTROL
OPEN RESET TIME
Range: 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01Default: 3.00 s
Upon issuing an OPEN command, the output relay “RLY 1 SW OPEN” will energize. Then, after a period of time that depends on the switch design (switch open reaction time), the switch will open. When the switch is detected as opened, a timer starts, and after the time set in S5 / RLY 1 CONTROL / SEAL-IN TIME has elapsed, the output relay “RLY 1 SW
![Page 137: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–63
OPEN” will de-energize. However, “RLY 1 SW OPEN” will de-energize after the time set in OPEN SW RESET TIME if this time is shorter than the total of, OPEN REACTION TIME + SEAL-IN TIME.
BLOCK OPEN CMND
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputsDefault: Off
This setting defines a block to the Open Switch command. When the selected input is asserted, the output relay “OPEN SWITCH” will be blocked.
CLOSE RESET TIME
Range: 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01Default: 3.00 s
Upon issuing a CLOSE command, the output relay “RLY 2 SW CLOSE” will energize. Then, after a period of time that depends on the switch design (switch close reaction time), the switch will close. When the switch is detected as closed, a timer starts, and after the time set in S5 / RLY 2 CONTROL / SEAL-IN TIME has elapsed, the output relay “RLY 2 SW CLOSE” will de-energize. However, “RLY 2 SW CLOSE” will de-energize after the time set in CLOSE SW RESET TIME, if this time is shorter than the total of, CLOSE REACTION TIME + SEAL-IN TIME.
BLOCK CLOSE CMND
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputsDefault: Off
This setting defines a block to the Close Switch command. When the selected input is asserted, the output relay “CLOSE” will be blocked.
ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled
This setting enables the Switch Alarm function. It will allow triggering of the alarm ‘Switch state failed’ according to the ‘Close Switch’ and ‘Switch Monitoring Logic’ tables in the logic diagrams below.
ALARM DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01Default: 4.00 s
Delays ‘Switch State Failed’ alarm.
NOTE
NOTE: Output relay 1 has been fixed and is not programmable to operate when the OPEN SWITCH output command is true.Output relay 2 has been fixed and is not programmable to operate when the CLOSE SWITCH output command is true.
![Page 138: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
5–64 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 28: Switch Control Logic - Sheet 1 of 3
SC
AD
AC
om
ma
nd
s
Op
en
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
OR
OR
89
18
33
.cd
r(”
Sh
ee
t1
”)
Clo
se
Re
mo
teIn
pu
ts(S
4)
Re
mo
teC
on
tro
l
Re
mo
teO
pe
n
Re
mo
teC
lose
Fa
cep
late
Pu
shb
utt
on
so
rM
EN
UC
om
ma
nd
s
Op
en
Clo
seRe
mo
teC
om
ma
nd
s
Ma
nu
al
Au
to
Off
PB
/U
SB
Co
mm
an
ds
Ma
nu
al
Au
to
Off
Pu
shb
utt
on
Loca
l
Re
mo
te
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
OR
OR
OR
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
OR
OR
OR
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
OR
OR
AN
D
Re
mo
teC
om
ma
nd
s
Ma
nu
al
Au
to
Off
Re
mo
teC
om
ma
nd
s
CO
MM
BLK
AU
TO
CO
MM
UN
BLO
CK
AU
TO
SE
TTI
NG
S
SA
VE
CO
MM
BLK
En
ab
led
=1 S
tate
CO
MM
FAIL
AL
AR
M
PO
WE
RLO
SS
AN
D
AN
D
AN
DA
ND
OR
OR
OR
>S R
Q Q
SE
T
CLR
Sta
te(E
EP
RO
M)
CO
MM
BLK
AU
TOS
TATE
AN
D
STA
TUS
Ma
nu
al M
od
e
AN
D
AN
D
STA
TUS
Au
toM
od
e
LED
: LO
CA
L
LED
: RE
MO
TE
LED
: MA
NU
AL
LED
: AU
TO STA
TUS
Off
Mo
de
Se
tA
uto
LED
inb
linki
ng
mo
de
Au
toR
em
ote
PC
Pro
gra
ma
nd
SC
AD
A
Fro
mA
uto
Se
ctio
na
lizin
gE
lem
en
t
Alw
ays
Off
AS
Sw
itch
Op
en
Co
mm
an
d
Op
en
Sw
itch
Re
qu
est
ToS
he
et
2
ToS
he
et
3
Fro
mS
CA
DA
ToS
he
ets
2&
3
SP
AR
E
Clo
seS
wit
chR
eq
ue
stO
R
![Page 139: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–65
Figure 29: Switch Control Logic - Sheet 2 of 3
SE
TT
ING
52b
CO
NTA
CT
Enable
d
SE
TT
ING
52a
CO
NTA
CT
Enable
d
AND
OR
Conta
ctIn
put2
(F6)
Sta
te
AND
Sw
itch
Open
OR
Atle
astone
sw
itch
conta
ct
enable
d
AND
SE
TT
ING
SW
RA
TE
DC
UR
RE
NT
I>
Irate
d,A
OR
OP
EN
SW
RE
SE
TT
IME
SE
TP
OIN
TAND
PU
SH
BU
TT
ON
BLO
CK
OP
EN
SW
ITC
H
Dis
able
d=
0
Enable
d=
1
LE
D:
SW
OP
EN
891834.c
dr
Conta
ctIn
put1
(F5)
Sta
te
AND
AND
OR
SE
AL-I
NT
IME
SE
TP
OIN
T
t RS
T
3.0
s
0.5
s
SE
TT
ING
BLO
CK
OP
EN
CM
ND
Dis
able
d=
0
(Se
lecte
dIn
pu
t,O
N=
1)
AND AND
SE
TT
ING
SW
ITC
HT
YP
E
Load
=0
No
Load
=1
SE
TT
ING
SW
RA
TE
DV
OLTA
GE
V>
Vra
ted,K
V
AND AND
OR
Fro
mS
heet3
Fro
mS
heet1
Local
Open
Sw
itch
Request
LE
D:B
LO
CK
OP
EN
SW
ITC
H
Cm
dO
pen
Sw
itch P
OS
ITIV
EE
DG
E
DE
TE
CT
OR
LATC
H
S R
FA
ULT
(Spare
)
Measure
dC
urr
ents
(Ia,Ib
,Ic
)
Measure
dV
oltages,
sourc
esid
e
(Va,V
b,V
c,V
ab,V
bc,V
ca)
FL
EX
LO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
Pw
rLoss
Src
OP
t RS
TS
witch
Open
Failed
OP
EN
SW
ITC
H
Opera
teF
orm
CO
utp
ut
(RLY
1S
WO
PE
N)
Open
Sw
itch
Fla
g
To
Sheet3
To
Sheet3
![Page 140: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
5–66 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 30: Switch Control Logic - Sheet 3 of 3
SE
TTI
NG
52
aC
ON
TAC
T
En
ab
led
PU
SH
BU
TTO
N
BLO
CK
CLO
SE
SW
ITC
H
Dis
ab
led
=0
En
ab
led
=1
SE
TTI
NG
BLO
CK
CLO
SE
CM
ND
Dis
ab
led
=0
(Se
lect
ed
Inp
ut,
ON
=1
)
SE
TTI
NG
SW
ITC
HTY
PE
Loa
d=
0
No
Loa
d=
1
SE
TTI
NG
V>
Vra
ted
, kV
SW
RA
TED
VO
LTA
GE
SE
TTI
NG
52
bC
ON
TAC
T
En
ab
led
AN
D
XO
R
AN
D
AN
D
AN
DO
R
SE
TPO
INT
SW
ALA
RM
DE
LAY
4s
AN
D
SE
TTI
NG
SW
ALA
RM
FUN
CTI
ON
En
ab
led
=1
AN
D
AN
DO
R
AN
D
AN
D
AN
D
PO
SIT
IVE
ED
GE
DE
TE
CT
OR
AN
D
SE
TPO
INT
CLO
SE
SW
RE
SE
TTI
ME
3.0
s
SE
TPO
INT
SE
AL-
INTI
ME
(S5
RLY
2C
ON
TRO
L)
0.5
s
AN
D
Fro
mS
he
et
2
AN
D
LATC
H
S R
CLO
SE
SW
ITC
H
Opera
teF
orm
CO
utp
ut
(RLY
2S
WC
LO
SE
)
Clo
se
Sw
itch
Fla
g
SW
Sta
te
Fa
ile
d
SW
Clo
se
Fa
ile
d
LED
: SW
ITC
HA
LAR
MS
WO
pe
nF
aile
d
Fro
mS
he
et
2
At
lea
st
on
esw
itch
co
nta
ct
en
ab
led
Sw
itch
Clo
se
d
LED
: SW
ITC
HC
LOS
ED
LED
: BLO
CK
CLO
SE
SW
ITC
H
Lo
ca
l
Clo
se
Sw
itch
Re
qu
est
Fro
mS
he
et
1
Fro
mS
he
et
1
Co
nta
ct
Inp
ut
2(F
6)
Sta
te
Cm
dC
lose
Sw
itch
FLE
XLO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
Pw
rLo
ssS
rcO
P
FLE
XLO
GIC
OP
ER
AN
D
Pw
rLo
ssLo
ad
OP
FA
ULT
(AS
locko
ut,
OV
,U
V)
Me
asu
red
Vo
lta
ge
s,
so
urc
ea
nd
Lo
ad
sid
e
(Va
,V
b,
Vc,
Va
b,
Vb
c,
Vca
)
Co
nta
ct
Inp
ut
1(F
5)
Sta
te
89
18
35
.cd
r
![Page 141: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–67
Change settings groupThe DGCS has three identical settings groups - Groups 1, 2 , and 3 - for all DGCS monitoring elements. Switching between these three groups is available either automatically by assigning an input (contact, virtual, remote, flexlogic element), or manually through communications.Group 1 is the default setting group. The device can automatically switch from Group 1 DGCS elements to the other group elements, and vice versa, by setting up the switching conditions under “Change Settings Group”. Under some application conditions, it may be undesirable to change settings groups. In such cases, the user can set a condition under “BLK GROUP CHANGE”, where if asserted, the active settings group will stay active, even if the input configured to switch to the other settings group is asserted. For example if the active group was group 1 at any given time, and the input configured under “BLK GROUP CHANGE” is asserted, the relay will maintain settings group 1, even if the input “SET GROUP 2 (3) ACTIVE” is asserted. Visa versa, if the “BLK GROUP CHANGE” input is asserted, the relay will not switch from group 2/3 to group 1, even if the input under “SET GROUP 2 (3) ACTIVE” is de-asserted. The device will default to settings group 1, if both the input “SET GROUP 2 (3) ACTIVE” and the blocking input “BLK GROUP CHANGE” are de-asserted. Table group 3 of settings has a higher priority than the rest of settings groups. That means, if both “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” and “SET GROUP 3 ACTIVE” signals are maintained asserted at the same time, the DGCS will change to the table 3 of settings.The logic functionality takes into account this feature. PATH: S4 CONTROLS > CHANGE SETP GROUP
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 12 (Order Code dependent), Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting selects an input, used to change to Settings Group 2, when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, the Settings Group 2 will stay active as long as the “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” input is asserted, and will revert to group 1 when this input is de-asserted.
SET GROUP 3 ACTIVE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 12 (Order Code dependent), Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting selects an input, used to change to Settings Group 3, when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, the Settings Group 3 will stay active as long as the “SET GROUP 3 ACTIVE” input is asserted, and will revert to the default group, when this input is de-asserted.
BLK GROUP CHANGE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 12 (Order Code dependent), Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing settings groups. When the assigned input is asserted, changing from one settings group to the other one is blocked.
![Page 142: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
5–68 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 31: Changing Settings groups - logic diagram
Virtual inputsThere are 32 Virtual Inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to Input commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols. SETTINGS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
OR OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
(De
fau
ltG
rou
p)
SE
TG
RO
UP
2A
CTI
VE
BLK
GR
OU
PC
HA
NG
E
SE
TG
RO
UP
3A
CTI
VE
Off
Off
Off
SE
TPO
INT
SE
TPO
INT
SE
TPO
INT
Use
Se
tpo
int
Gro
up
3
Use
Se
tpo
int
Gro
up
1
Use
Se
tpo
int
Gro
up
2
89
19
91
. cd
r
![Page 143: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–69
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 to 32Range: Off, OnDefault: Off
The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETTINGS > S4 CONTROL > VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. Entering OFF or On in the selected menu window will change the input’s state.
NOTE
NOTE: See also the Virtual inputs section under S5 Inputs/Outputs.
Cold load pickupThe DGCS can be programmed to block the instantaneous over-current elements, and raise the pickup level of the time over-current elements, when a cold load condition is detected. The cold load condition is detected during closing of the breaker on a feeder that has been de-energized for a long time. The feeder inrush current and the motor accelerating current during breaker closing may be above some over-current protection settings. The diagram shows the slow decaying of the cold load current starting at about 500% of the nominal current at the time of breaker closing, decaying down to 300% after 1 second, 200% after 2 seconds, and 150% after 3 seconds.
Figure 32: Cold load pickup
The relay detects Cold Load condition (Cold Load Pickup armed), if the currents on all three phases drop below 3% of the CT nominal rating for the period of time greater, than the Outage Time Before Cold Load setting. The Cold Load condition can be immediately initiated (Outage Time Before Cold Load timer bypassed), by asserting a contact input selected for External CLP Initiate. The second timer Cold Load Pickup Block is used to specify the time of blocking the instantaneous over-current elements, and the time of raised pickup levels of the time over-current elements, after breaker closing. The timer starts when at least one of the three phase currents is above 10% of CT nominal. Upon timer expiration, the settings return to normal.The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > COLD LOAD PICKUP
Time (seconds)
Curr
ent(%
ofnom
inal)
0
100
200
300
400
500
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
OUTAGE
PICKUP PICKUP
LOAD ENERGIZED
X
NORMAL TRIP SETTING
898750.CDR
![Page 144: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
5–70 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CLP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled
This setting enables the Cold Load Pickup function.
OUTAGE TIME
Range: 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 minDefault: 20 min
This timer starts when the feeder is de-energized (currents drop below 3% of CT nominal). The Cold Load Pickup is armed after the time expires.
CLP BLOCKING TIME
Range: 1 to 1000 s in steps of 1 sDefault: 5 s
This setting sets the blocking time for the selected Instantaneous Overcurrent elements, and the raised pickup level time for the Time Overcurrent elements. This timer starts when currents greater than 10% of CT nominal are detected.
CLP EXT INITIATE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 8, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Virtual Output 1 to 32Default: Off
This setting allows the user to select Contact Input, Virtual Input/Output and force the CLP element into the Cold Load Pickup armed state, bypassing the timer Outage Time.
BLOCK PH IOC/BLOCK NTRL IOC/BLOCK OV/BLOCK UV
Range: No, YesDefault: No
Each element on the list can be selected for block or not, upon a Cold Load Pickup condition.
SELECT SP GROUP
Range: Active Group, Group 1, Group 2, Group 3Default: Active Group
The CLP blocking function will block the IOC and adjust the TOC pickup levels for the Overcurrent elements from whichever Setting Group is active, if the Active Group for that setting is selected.
RAISE PH TOC PKP
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%Default: 0%
The pickup level of the TOC element can be raised by 0 to 100% upon a Cold Load Pickup condition.
![Page 145: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–71
Figure 33: Cold Load Pickup - logic diagram
Ia<
3%
CT
Ib<
3%
CT
Ic<
3%
CT
Ia<
10
%C
T
Ib<
10
%C
T
Ic<
10
%C
T
CLP
INIT
IATE
CLP
FU
NC
TIO
N:
Dis
ab
led
En
ab
led
OU
TAG
ETI
ME
EN
AB
LER
ES
ET
RU
N
CLP
BLO
CK
ING
TIM
E
EN
AB
LE
RU
N
BLO
CK
PH
IOC
BLO
CK
NTR
LIO
C
BLO
CK
OV
BLO
CK
UV
Yes
=1
, No
=0
Yes
=1
, No
=0
Yes
=1
, No
=0
Yes
=1
,No
=0
LED
: AL
AR
M
Op
era
teo
utp
ut
rela
ysu
po
nse
lec
tio
n
Re
cord
Eve
nt
Me
ssa
ge
Co
ldLo
ad
PK
P
Se
lec
tS
etp
Gro
up
RA
ISE
PH
TOC
PK
P
Gro
up
No
.
Ra
ise
by
Pe
rce
nt
Blo
ck
Blo
ck
Blo
ck
Blo
ck
Se
lec
tG
rou
p
Se
lec
tG
rou
p
89
18
32
.cd
r
AND AND AND AND
AND AND
AND
AND
OR OR
AND
Co
ldLo
ad
Pic
kup
arm
ed
(Ext
ern
al I
np
ut)
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
SE
TT
ING
RA
ISE
PH
TOC
PK
P
RU
N
SE
TT
ING
CLP
BLO
CK
ING
TIM
E
EN
AB
LE
RU
N
SE
TP
OIN
T
SE
LEC
TED
PE
RC
EN
TAG
E
ToP
ha
seTi
me
Ove
rcu
rre
nt
Ele
me
nt
![Page 146: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
5–72 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FlexLogic™The DGCS FlexLogic™ system, defines operators, and lists of operands. In essence, all the necessary information for custom built logic. The FlexLogic tool is accessible from the EnerVista DGCS Setup program under the SETTINGS/ FLEXLOGIC menuAll DGCS digital signal states are represented by FlexLogic™ operands. Each operand is in one of two states: on (asserted, logic 1, or set), or off (de-asserted, logic 0, or reset). There is a FlexLogic™ operand for each contact input, contact output, communications command, control panel command, element trip, and element alarm, as well as many others.A list of FlexLogic™ operands and operators are sequentially processed once every 4.17 ms or 5 ms, depending on the power system frequency (60 Hz or 50 Hz). When list processing encounters an operand, the value of that operand is placed in a first in - first out stack. When list processing encounters a calculation operator, the number of values required for the calculation are removed from the stack, and the result of the operation is placed back on the stack. The operators are logic gates (for example, AND, OR, NOT), timers, latches, one-shots, and assignments. Assignment operators assign the value calculated by the preceding operators to a special class of operands called virtual outputs. Like any other operand, a virtual output can be used as an input to any operator –feedback to achieve seal-in is allowed. When list processing encounters an end operator, processing is stopped until the next processing cycle, at which time it restarts at the top of the list.Each contact output has a setting to specify the operand that drives the output. Any operand may be selected – selection of a virtual output is the means by which FlexLogic™ directly controls external equipment such as the motor contactors.The operators used in FlexLogic™ conform to the following rules:
• 512 lines for bulding logic are available in the FlexLogic tool. All lines are executed every 1 / 4 power system cycle (4.17 ms. or 5 ms).
• A virtual output may only be assigned once within the FlexLogic environment. An unassigned virtual output will have a value of off.
• A maximum of thirty (32) general purpose timers (timers 1 through 32) are available for configuration. Each timer may only be used once within the FlexLogic environment.
• A maximum of thirty (30) one-shots is allowed.
• A maximum of 16 latches is supported.
The operators available in FlexLogic™ are shown below:
![Page 147: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–73
FlexLogic™ operands The FlexLogic™ operands available in the DGCS are listed below.
Control operands: Group 1 Active OP......................................Activates when Setting Group 1 is applied.Group 1 Active DPO ..................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to a Setting Group
different from Group 1.Group 2 Active OP......................................Activates when Setting Group 2 is applied.Group 2 Active DPO ..................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to a Setting Group
different from Group 2.Group 3 Active OP......................................Activates when Setting Group 3 is applied.Group 3 Active DPO ..................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to a Setting Group
different from Group 3.Auto Ctrl .........................................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to Auto control mode.Remote Ctrl...................................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to Remote control mode.Manual Ctrl ...................................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to Manual control mode.Local Ctrl ........................................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to Local control mode.OFF Ctrl ...........................................................Activates when the DGCS is switched to OFF control mode.AS Switch Open OP ...................................Activates when the Switch Open command is issued by the AS
function.AS Switch Open DPO................................Activates when the Switch Open command drops out.Auto Switch Open......................................Activates when the Switch Open command operates in Auto
mode.Manual Switch Open ................................Activates when the Switch Open command operates in Manual
mode.Auto Switch Close......................................Activates when the Switch Close command operates in Auto
mode.
Operator Inputs Description
<operand> none The output value is the value of the named <operand>.
NOT 1 The output value is “on” if and only if any of the input values are “off”.
OR 2 to 16 The output value is “on” if and only if any of the input values are “on”.
AND 2 to 16 The output value is “on” if and only if all of the input values are “on”.
NOR 2 to 16 The output value is “on” if and only if all of the input values are “off”.
NAND 2 to 16 The output value is “on” if and only if any of the input values are “off”.
XOR 2 The output value is “on” if and only if one input value is “on” and the other input value is “off”.
TIMER 1 The output value is “on” if the input value has been “on” for the set pickup time. Once the output value is “on”, it remains “on” until the input value has been “off” for the set dropout time.
LATCH 2 The output value is the state of a reset-dominant volatile bi-stable latch, where the first input value is the set input, and the second input value is the reset input.
Positive-one-shot 1 The output value is “on” for one processing cycle following an off-to-on transition of the input value.
Negative-one-shot 1 The output value is “on” for one processing cycle following an on-to-off transition of the input value.
Dual-one-shot 1 The output value is “on” for one processing cycle following either an on-to-off or off-to-on transition of the input value.
ASSIGN <operand> 1 The input value is assigned to the named operand. There is otherwise no output value.
END none The first END encountered terminates the current processing cycle.
![Page 148: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
5–74 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Manual Switch Close................................Activates when the Switch Close command operates in Manual mode.
Reverse Power OP .....................................Activates when the Reverse Power element operates.Reverse Power DPO..................................Activates when the Reverse Power level drops below the pickup
level.Reset Open Count .....................................Activates when an Open Count Reset is issued.Reset Close Count .....................................Activates when an Close Count Reset is issued.Reset SW I2t .................................................Activates when an Close Count Reset is issued.CBa Closed....................................................Activated when PhA of circuit breaker is in the Closed state.CBa Opened .................................................Activated when PhA of circuit breaker is in the Open state.CBb Closed....................................................Activated when PhB of circuit breaker is in the Closed state.CBb Opened .................................................Activated when PhB of circuit breaker is in the Open state.CBc Closed....................................................Activated when PhC of circuit breaker is in the Closed state.CBc Opened .................................................Activated when PhC of circuit breaker is in the Open state.CB 3 Closed...................................................Activated when CB 3 Poll is in the Closed state.CB 3 Opened ................................................Activated when CB 3 Poll is in the Open state.
Input/Output Operands:Contact Input 1 (2 to X) On ....................Asserted when the respective Contact Input is activated.Contact Input 1 (2 to X) Off....................Asserted when the respective Contact Input is deactivated.Contact Output 1 (2 to X) On ................Asserted when the respective Contact Output is activated.Contact Output 1 (2 to X) Off ................Asserted when the respective Contact Output is deactivated.VI1 (VI1 to VO32) On .................................Asserted when the respective Virtual Input is activated.VI1 (VI2 to VI32) Off ...................................Asserted when the respective Virtual Input is deactivated.VO1 (VO2 to VO32) On .............................Asserted when the respective Virtual Output is activated.VO1Off to VO32 Off...................................Asserted when the respective Virtual Output is deactivated.
Alarm Operands:Any Alarm OP...............................................Activates when any Alarm Operand is asserted (logic 1).Not Configured ...........................................Activates when the DGC status is “Not Configured” under
INSTALLATION/PRODUCT STATUS.Self-test Alarm OP .....................................Activates when the CB detects a Self-Test error.Comm Fail Alarm OP ................................Activates when the communication channel fails.IOC State Alarm OP...................................Activates when the IOC State Alarm operates. IOC State Alarm DPO ...............................Activates when the IOC State Alarm drops out. OC FOL BY PWR LOSS OP.......................Activates when OC FO BY PWR LOSS operates. OC FOL BY PWR LOSS DPO....................Activates when OC FO BY PWR LOSS drops out. First AS Trip Alarm OP..............................Activates when the First AS Trip Alarm operates. First AS Trip Alarm DPO ..........................Activates when the First AS Trip Alarm drops out. AS Lockout Alarm OP ...............................Activates when AS Lockout Alarm operates. AS Lockout Alarm DPO............................Activates when AS Lockout Alarm drops out. Auto Sect Timeout OP .............................Activates when Auto Sect Timeout operates. Auto Sect Timeout DPO..........................Activates when Auto Sect Timeout drops out. Ph IOC Alarm OP.........................................Activates when Phase IOC operates. Ph IOC Alarm DPO .....................................Activates when Phase IOC drops out. Ph TOC Alarm OP .......................................Activates when Phase TOC operates. Ph TOC Alarm DPO ....................................Activates when Phase TOC drops out. NTRL IOC Alarm OP ...................................Activates when NTRL IOC operates. NTRL IOC Alarm DPO................................Activates when NTRL IOC drops out. Ph OV Alarm OP..........................................Activates when Phase OV operates.
![Page 149: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–75
Ph OV Alarm DPO.......................................Activates when Phase OV drops out. Ph UV Alarm OP ..........................................Activates when Phase UV operates. Ph UV Alarm DPO.......................................Activates when Phase UV drops out. Volt UNBAL Alarm OP...............................Activates when Voltage UNBAL operates. Volt UNBAL Alarm DPO ...........................Activates when Voltage UNBAL drops out. CLP Alarm PKP.............................................Activates when CLP picks up. CLP Alarm OP...............................................Activates when CLP operates. CLP Alarm DPO............................................Activates when CLP drops out. Pwr Loss Src A, B, C OP............................Activates when Power Loss on phase A, B, C of source voltage
side operates. Pwr Loss Src A, B, C DPO ........................Activates when Power Loss on phase A, B, C of source voltage
side drops out. Pwr Loss Load A, B, C OP........................Activates when Power Loss on phase A, B, C of load voltage side
operates. Pwr Loss Load A, B, C DPO ....................Activates when Power Loss on phase A, B, C of load voltage side
drops out. Switch Open .................................................Activates when Switch is in Open state. Switch Closed ..............................................Activates when Switch is in Closed state. Switch Open Failed OP ............................Activates when Switch Open Failed operates. Switch Close Failed OP ............................Activates when Switch Close Failed operates. Switch State Failed OP ............................Activates when Switch State Failed operates. OP Cnt Lim Reached OP..........................Activates when the total open operations limit has been
reached. CL Cnt Lim Reached OP ..........................Activates when the total close operations limit has been
reached. KI2t Limit Reached OP .............................Activates when the total KI2t value limit has been reached..
Block and Inhibit Operands:Group Change Block OP .........................Activates when the input programmed to block group change
is energized.Group Change Block DPO......................Activates when the input programmed to block group change
is de-energized.CLP PhIOC1 Blk OP ....................................Activated when the CLP Ph IOC block operates.CLP PhIOC1 Blk DPO .................................Activated when the CLP Ph IOC block drops out.CLP NeIOC1 Blk OP....................................Activated when the CLP Neutral IOC block operates.CLP NeIOC1 Blk DPO.................................Activated when the CLP Neutral IOC block drops out.CLP OV Blk OP..............................................Activated when the CLP OV block operates.CLP OV Blk DPO...........................................Activated when the CLP OV block drops out.CLP UV Blk OP..............................................Activated when the CLP UV block operates.CLP UV Blk DPO...........................................Activated when the CLP UV block drops out.Ph IOC Block OP..........................................Activated when the Phase IOC block operates.Ph IOC Block DPO.......................................Activated when the Phase IOC block drops out.Ph TOC Block OP.........................................Activated when the Phase TOC block operates.Ph TOC Block DPO......................................Activated when the Phase TOC block drops out.Ntrl IOC Block OP........................................Activated when the Neutral IOC block operates.Ntrl IOC Block DPO ....................................Activated when the Neutral IOC block drops out.Sw Arc Curr Block OP ...............................Activated when the Sw Arcing Current function is blocked.Sw Arc Curr Block DPO............................Activated when the Sw Arcing Current function drops out.Ph OV Block OP ...........................................Activated when the Phase OV block operates.Ph OV Block DPO........................................Activated when the Phase OV block drops out.
![Page 150: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
5–76 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Ph UV Block OP ...........................................Activated when the Phase UV block operates.Ph UV Block DPO........................................Activated when the Phase UV block drops out.Volt UNBAL Blk OP.....................................Activated when the Voltage Unbalance block operates.Volt UNBAL Blk DPO..................................Activated when the Voltage Unbalance block drops out.Block Open Switch OP .............................Activated when the DGCS Block Open Switch operates.Block Open Switch DPO..........................Activated when the DGCS Block Open Switch drops out.Block Close Switch OP .............................Activated when the DGCS Block Close Switch operates.Block Close Switch DPO..........................Activated when the DGCS Block Close Switch drops out.
S5 Inputs/Outputs
Figure 34: Inputs/Outputs menu
Contact inputsThe relay is equipped with six (6) contact inputs, which can be used to provide a variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of protection elements, etc. A further twelve (12) contact inputs can be added with the purchase of another IO_C board (see the Order Codes section). All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the typical wiring diagram) that require an external voltage source.
891859.cdr
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
CONTACT INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 1
CONTACT INPUT 2
...
CONTACT INPUT x
▼
S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
▼
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY 1 CONTROL
RLY 2 CONTROL
RLY 3 AUXILIARY
RLY 4 AUXILIARY
RLY 5 AUXILIARY
...
RLY x AUXILIARY
▼
S5 RLY 1 CONTROL
NAME
RLY 1 SW OPEN
SEAL-IN TIME
▼
S5 RLY 2 CONTROL
NAME
RLY 2 SW CLOSE
SEAL-IN TIME
▼
S5 RLY 3 AUXILIARY
NAME
FUNCTION
OUTPUT TYPE
OPERATION
▼
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1
VI 1
NAME
FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
▼
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 32
VI 32
VI 32
NAME
FUNCTION
VI 32 TYPE
▼
![Page 151: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–77
PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 1
Range: Fourteen CharactersDefault: 52a Contact
CONTACT INPUT 2
Range: Fourteen CharactersDefault: 52b Contact
CONTACT INPUT X [3 to 18]
Range: Fourteen CharactersDefault: Input X (Exceptions: 7=Battery Fuse, 8=Battery Plus)
Each of the contact inputs can be named to reflect the function it represents within the application. Up to 14 alpha-numeric characters are available for names.
Output relaysThe DGCS is equipped with fourteen electromechanical output relays: 2 form A control relays (Relay 1 — Switch Open, and Relay 2 — Switch Close), and up to 12 Auxiliary relays depending on the ordered configuration (see the Order Codes section).PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
Control Relay "RLY 1 SW OPEN"
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: RLY 1 SW OPEN
This relay is dedicated to the switch open output function and that cannot be changed.
SEAL-IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s, Step 0.01 sDefault: 0.5 s
Refer to the “Switch control” section and Figure 24.
Control Relay "RLY 2 SW CLOSE"
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: RLY 2 SW CLOSE
This relay is dedicated to the switch close output function and that cannot be changed.
SEAL-IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s, Step 0.01 sDefault: 0.5 s
Refer to the “Switch control” section and Figure 25.
Auxiliary Relay 3 “BATT CHARGING”
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: BATT CHARGING
This relay is dedicated to the battery charging output function and that cannot be changed. Refer to the “Battery backup” section and Figure 7.
Auxiliary Relay 4 “BATT TESTING”
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: BATT TESTING
This relay is dedicated to the battery testing output function and that cannot be changed. Refer to the “Battery backup” section and Figure 7.
![Page 152: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
5–78 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Auxiliary Relay 5 to 14
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: Relay 5 (to 14)
FUNCTION
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 12 On, Contact Input 1 to 12 Off, Contact Output 1 to 8 On, Contact Output 1 to 8 Off, Virtual Input 1 to 32 On, Virtual Input 1 to 32 Off, Virtual Output 1 to 32 On, Virtual Output 1 to 32 Off, Any Alarm OP, Any monitoring function output OP or DPO, Any power loss condition OP or DPO, Any counter limit reached, Any block command OP or DPO, Any Switch and breaker state, Any Mode selected, Any group active.
NOTE
NOTE: Refer to DGCS Communications guide for the complete list of functions available for selection.
Default: Off
The auxiliary relay state is equal to the value of the selected function variable.
TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, LatchedDefault: Self-Reset
Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset, or Latched. If the Self-Reset type is selected, the output relay is energized as long as the element is in operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected, the output relay stays energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized upon the reset command.
If an auxiliary output is only required while the activating condition is present, select Self-Reset. Once an activating condition disappears, the auxiliary relay returns to the non-active state and the associated message automatically clears. To ensure all auxiliary function conditions are acknowledged, select Latched.
OPERATION
Range: Failsafe, Non-FailsafeDefault: Non-Failsafe
The auxiliary relay state is equal to the value of the selected function variable.When Failsafe operation is selected, the auxiliary relay is energized or de-energized (state change) depending on the following conditions:
1. The auxiliary relay is de-energized, if the relay is not IN SERVICE or the control power is not applied to the relay.
2. The auxiliary relay is energized when the control power is applied to the relay and the relay is IN SERVICE mode.
3. The auxiliary relay stays de-energized, when the control power is applied, upon major self-test failure during relay boot up.
4. The auxiliary relay changes state from energized to de-energized if the DGCS experiences any major self-test failure.
Output Relay "RLY 1SW OPEN"
This relay is dedicated to the switch open output function and that cannot be changed.PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
NAME
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: RLY 1 SW OPEN
The name setting is used to change the name of this relay from “RLY 1 SW OPEN” to a different one, for example “RELAY 1”.
![Page 153: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–79
SEAL-IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s, Step 0.01 sDefault: 0.5 s
Refer to the “Switch control” section and Figure 24.
Output Relay "RLY 2SW CLOSE"
This relay is dedicated to the switch close output function and that cannot be changed.PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
NAME
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: RLY 2 SW CLOSE
The name setting is used to change the name of this relay from “RLY 2 SW CLOSE” to a different one, for example “RELAY 2”.
SEAL-IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s, Step 0.01 sDefault: 0.5 s
Refer to the “Switch control” section and Figure 25.
Auxiliary Relay 3"BATT CHARGING"
This relay is dedicated to the battery charging output function and that cannot be changed. PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
NAME
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: BATT CHARGING
The name setting is used to change the name of this relay from “BATT CHARGING” to a different one, for example “BATTERY”. Refer to the “Battery backup” section and Figure 7.
Auxiliary Relay 4“BATT TESTING”
This relay is dedicated to the battery testing output function and that cannot be changed. Refer to the “Battery backup” section and Figure 7.PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
NAME
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: BATT TESTING
The name setting is used to change the name of this relay from “BATT TESTING” to a different one, for example “TESTING”.
Auxiliary Relay 5 to 14 PATH: SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS
NAME
Range: Any alpha-numeric combination, 14 characters longDefault: Relay 5 (to 14)
The name setting is used to change the name of this relay from “Relay 5 (to 14)” to a different one, for example “RLY FIVE”.
![Page 154: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
5–80 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FUNCTION
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 12 On, Contact Input 1 to 12 Off, Contact Output 1 to 8 On, Contact Output 1 to 8 Off, Virtual Input 1 to 32 On, Virtual Input 1 to 32 Off, Virtual Output 1 to 32 On, Virtual Output 1 to 32 Off, Any Alarm OP, Any monitoring function output OP or DPO, Any power loss condition OP or DPO, Any counter limit reached, Any block command OP or DPO, Any Switch and breaker state, Any Mode selected, Any group active.
NOTE
NOTE: Refer to DGCS Communications guide for the complete list of functions available for selection.
Default: Off
The auxiliary relay state is equal to the value of the selected function variable.
TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, LatchedDefault: Self-Reset
Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset, or Latched. If the Self-Reset type is selected, the output relay is energized as long as the element is in operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected, the output relay stays energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized upon the reset command.
If an auxiliary output is only required while the activating condition is present, select Self-Reset. Once an activating condition disappears, the auxiliary relay returns to the non-active state and the associated message automatically clears. To ensure all auxiliary function conditions are acknowledged, select Latched.
OPERATION
Range: Failsafe, Non-FailsafeDefault: Non-Failsafe
The auxiliary relay state is equal to the value of the selected function variable.When Failsafe operation is selected, the auxiliary relay is energized or de-energized (state change) depending on the following conditions:
1. The auxiliary relay is de-energized, if the relay is not IN SERVICE or the control power is not applied to the relay.
2. The auxiliary relay is energized when the control power is applied to the relay and the relay is IN SERVICE mode.
3. The auxiliary relay stays de-energized, when the control power is applied, upon major self-test failure during relay boot up.
4. The auxiliary relay changes state from energized to de-energized if the DGCS experiences any major self-test failure.
Virtual inputsThere are 32 Virtual Inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to Input commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols. Virtual Input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input function and selecting the Virtual Input Type - Self-Reset or Latched - under SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS. Next, under SETTINGS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS, the user assigns either an On or an Off command to the Virtual Input enabled earlier.Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic diagram below, a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset, or Latched. When Self-Reset is selected, and the command On is executed, the virtual input is evaluated as a pulse at rate of one protection pass. When the Latched type is selected, the On state of the Virtual Input will be latched. SETTINGS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
![Page 155: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–81
VI x NAME
Range: 18 CharactersDefault: Virtual IN x
This setting defines a programmable name for the Virtual Input.
VI x FUNCTION
Range: Disabled/EnabledDefault: Disabled
The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled.
VI x TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, LatchedDefault: Self-reset
When the Self-Reset type is selected, the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one protection pass only, upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When the Latched type is selected, the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.
NOTE
NOTE: See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS, on how to trigger a virtual input signal state.
Figure 35: Virtual Inputs Scheme - logic diagram
SETTING
V INPUT FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
AND“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 1” AND
SETTING
V INPUT1 TYPE
Self-Reset
LatchedAND
LATCH
S
R
>
OR
SETTING
V INPUT1 NAME:(Operand)
V Input1 Status
891924.cdr
![Page 156: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
5–82 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
![Page 157: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 6: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
SELF-TEST WARNINGS
The DGC Controller performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to ensure that every testable unit of the hardware and software is alive and functioning correctly.
FASTPATH: Self-Test Warnings indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware may exist! Follow the table below which contains recommended remedies for fixing errors. If errors persist call the factory.
![Page 158: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
6–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELF-TEST WARNINGS CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODE ERROR CODE MEANING
ERROR DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE REMEDY
Error code 1 Ordercode error This warning occurs when the DGC Controller fails to match the installed modules to the ordercode set from factory.
Verify all modules on the unit are screwed in properly. If issue persists call factory
Error code 2 Clock error This warning occurs when the controller’s clock is not programmed.
Program the DGC Controller’s clock.
Error code 4 Calibration error This warning occurs when the relay has not been factory calibrated.
Send the unit back to the factory for repair.
Error code 8 EEPROM error EEPROM Hardware failure.
Send the unit back to the factory for repair.
Error code 16 Sys. Health error
Error code 32 IO Comms Fail error This warning occurs when CPU fails to read serial numbers from installed modules.
Verify all modules on the unit are screwed in properly. If issue still persist call factory.
Error code 64 IO Zero Cross error This warning occurs when the controller’s Vaux input fails to read valid control power.
Verify the control power wiring to the Vaux inputs is secure, if issue persists call factory.
Error code 128 Frequency error This warning occurs when the controller measures high frequency fluctuations.
This is normally caused from external signals, If issue still persist call factory.
![Page 159: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 7: Commands
Commands
Commands
The DGCS OPEN/CLOSE commands can be used in three different ways:
• OPEN and CLOSE commands from the DGC faceplate pushbuttons or the DGC menu.This method of control is active in Local / Manual mode, providing that the DGCS control is not set to OFF and no other blocks or switching inhibits are applied.
• Remote OPEN and CLOSE control upon energizing of assigned inputs under SETTINGS/CONTROLS/REMOTE CONTROL. This method of control will be active, in Remote / Manual and Remote / Auto mode, providing the DGC–S control is not set to OFF and no other blocks or switching inhibits are applied.
• OPEN and CLOSE commands over DNP addresses using radio and the EnerVista DGCS Setup menu. This method of control will be active in Remote / Auto mode, providing the DGCS control is not set to OFF and no other blocks or switching inhibits are applied.
The DGCS RESET command is available on the faceplate keypad button, shown below, and in the Commands menu.
Figure 1: DGC faceplate OPEN/CLOSE commands
![Page 160: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
7–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COMMANDS CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS
PATH: MAIN MENU > COMMANDS
OPEN
Range: No, YesDefault: No
This setting is used to open the Switch from the DGC menu. Selecting “Yes” and pressing the ENTER pushbutton from the keypad initiates an OPEN pulse command. The “Yes” command pulse is set to 50ms.
CLOSE
Range: No, YesDefault: No
This setting is used to close the Switch from the DGC menu. Selecting “Yes” and pressing the ENTER pushbutton from the keypad initiates a CLOSE pulse command. The “Yes” command pulse is set to 50ms.
RESET
Range: No, YesDefault: Disabled
This setting is used to reset activated LEDs and any alarms or target messages. Selecting “Yes” and pressing the ENTER pushbutton from the keypad initiates a RESET command. The “Yes” command pulse is set to 50ms.
BATT TEST CONT RST
Range: No, YesDefault: Disabled
It is necessary to execute this command after a defective battery has been replaced with a new one. Selecting ‘Yes’ will set the value of the BATT TEST COUNT to zero.
Remote OPEN and CLOSE (upon energizing of inputs selected under SETTINGS/CONTROLS/REMOTE CONTROL)The Switch OPEN and CLOSE commands received via the selected inputs, are executed if the DGCS control is enabled and the selected control mode is Remote (the Remote LED is lit). The remote OPEN and CLOSE commands are blocked if the “Local” control mode is selected (the “Local” LED is lit) or the corresponding BLOCK command is active. The Remote Reset command can be executed by asserting the selected input when the controller is in Remote mode. PATH: S4 SETPOINTS > CONTROLS > REMOTE CONTROL
REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Off
This setting defines the Input to trigger the OPEN command to the switch. This Input can be selected from the list of Inputs including Contact Inputs, Virtual Inputs, Protection or Control Operand, as well as Input Flags received from SCADA, or IEDs.
REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Disabled
This setting defines the Input to trigger the CLOSE command to the switch. This Input can be selected from the list of Inputs including Contact Inputs, Virtual Inputs, Protection or Control Operand, as well as Input Flags received from SCADA, or IEDs.
![Page 161: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS COMMANDS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–3
REMOTE RESET
Range: No, Off, Contact Input, Virtual Input, Virtual OutputDefault: Off
This setting is used to reset the LEDs, alarms, and target messages generated during some abnormal Switch condition. The setting provides for the selection of an Input from a list of Inputs, that performs the RESET action upon activation.
OPEN and CLOSE commands over DNP addressing, using radioThe OPEN or CLOSE command can be initiated from a SCADA or an IED using radio communication. The controlling device maps an OPEN or CLOSE command to its binary outputs and transmits them via radio communication to the controller. Upon receipt the DGCS controller executes the appropriate action. The DGCS controller executes the received commands, if the controller is not in OFF mode and the selected control mode is set to “Remote” (the Remote LED is lit). The remote OPEN and CLOSE commands via radio, are blocked if the “Local” control mode is selected (the “Local” LED is lit).
![Page 162: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
7–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COMMANDS CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS
![Page 163: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–1
Multilin DGCS Switch Controller
Chapter 8: Maintenance
Maintenance
The DGCS allows you to monitor the device for detailed product informations, it’s operating temperature, and collected operational data.
Figure 1: Maintenance Menu
M4 FACTORY SERVICE
ENTER FACT: PSWD
M1 PRODUCT INFO
PRODUCT NAME
ORDER CODE
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
MAIN BUILD DATE
MAIN BUILD TIME
MAIN BOOT REVISION
MAIN BOOT DATE
MAIN BOOT TIME
SERIAL NUMBER
▼
MAINTENANCE
M1 PRODUCT INFO
M2 PRODUCT MAINT
M4 FACTORY SERVICE
M3 STATISTICS
▼
891862.cdr
M3 RESET COUNTERS
RESET OPEN COUNT
RESET CLOSE COUNT
RESET KI2t COUNT
CLEAR ENERGY
RST POS REAL ENRGY
RST NEG REAL ENRGY
RST POS REAC ENRGY
RST NEG REAC ENRGY
▼
M3 COUNTERS
TRIP CNT
OPEN COUNT
CLOSE COUNT
KI2t COUNT PH A
BATTERY TEST COUNT
KI2t COUNT PH B
Ki2t COUNT PH C
▼
M3 STATISTICS
COUNTERS
RESET COUNTERS
PRESET COUNTERS
M3 PRESET COUNTERS
INI OPEN COUNT
INI CLOSE COUNT
▼
M2 PRODUCT MAINT
INTERNAL TEMP
![Page 164: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
8–2 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
M1 PRODUCT INFORMATION CHAPTER 8: MAINTENANCE
M1 Product information
The product information table provides information such as the DGCS name, order code, firmware revision, boot code, serial number, etc. This is the place where one verifies whether updates have been performed correctly on the device.PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO
PRODUCT NAME
Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters Default: Motor Name
ORDER CODEDGC-VEHSSABCDG
This screen shows a DGCS Order Code.
MAIN FIRMWARE REVISION1.10
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Revision.
MAIN BUILD DATEAug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Date.
MAIN BUILD TIME16:32:38
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Time.
MAIN BOOT REVISION1.20
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Revision.
MAIN BOOT DATEDec 11 2009
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Date.
MAIN BOOT TIME10:44:54
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Time.
SERIAL NUMBERML0A08M00133
Each relay has a unique serial number.
M2 Product maintenance
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M2 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE
INTERNAL TEMP57.0°C 134.6°F
This screen displays the actual temperature inside the DGCS.
![Page 165: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
CHAPTER 8: MAINTENANCE M3 STATISTICS
MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–3
M3 Statistics
CountersPATH: M3 MAINTENENCE > STATISTICS > COUNTERS
TRIP CNT
Displays the actual trip count from the Auto sectionalizing element.
OPEN COUNT
Displays the actual count of Switch open actions.
CLOSE COUNT
Displays the KI2t value for phase A.
KI2t COUNT PHA
Displays the KI2t value for phase A.
KI2t COUNT PHB
Displays the KI2t value for phase B.
KI2t COUNT PHC
Displays the KI2t value for phase C.
BATTERY TEST COUNT: Displays the count of unsuccessful battery tests.
Reset countersPATH: M3 MAINTENANCE > STATISTICS > RESET COUNTERS
Entering “Yes” into the selected counter menu resets the actual count value.
Preset countersPATH: M3 MAINTENANCE > STATISTICS > PRESET COUNTERS
INI OPEN COUNT
Default: 9999Range: 1 to 9999 Steps 1
This setting is the initial count for the Open Counter. The actual count is added to this number to get the total count. When the SAVE command is sent to the relay, the value is updated into the internal OPEN COUNTER. After power-up the relay keeps the previous counter value, saved in EEPROM, regardless of the stored value of this setting. After a command reset, the counter clears regardless of the value stored in the INI SW OPEN COUNT.
INI CLOSE COUNT
Default: 9999Range: 1 to 9999 Steps 1
This setting is the initial count for the Close Counter. The actual count is added to this number to get the total count. When the SAVE command is sent to the relay, the value is updated into the internal CLOSE COUNTER. After power-up the relay keeps the previous counter value, saved in EEPROM, regardless of the stored value of this setting. After a command reset, the counter will be cleared regardless of the value stored in the INI SW CLOSE COUNT.
![Page 166: Multilin DGCS Switch Controller - GE Grid Solutions · 2013. 3. 18. · akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora mar ķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022081600/6055331ab9b825465509508b/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
8–4 MULTILIN DGCS SWITCH CONTROLLER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
M3 STATISTICS CHAPTER 8: MAINTENANCE